(clone-indirect-buffer-other-window): New command.
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
404fa7d6
DL
1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
6For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
1fa28578
GM
11** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
12the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
13
14** There are new configure options associated with the support for
15images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
16\f
17* Changes in Emacs 21.1
18
0daee095
GM
19** The new command `clone-buffer-indirectly' can be used to create
20an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer.
21
176256a1
DL
22** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
23`make-backup-file-name-function' are provided to control the placement
24of backups, typically in a single directory or in an invisible
25sub-directory.
26
dd0add8e
DL
27** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
28characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
29
699238d9
GM
30** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
31compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
32this behavior.
33
34The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
35compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
36Emacs dump core.
37
38** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 39
7233c5bd
GM
40*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
41whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
42is useful for debugging X problems.
43
44Example:
45
699238d9 46 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 47
100b3cbb
GM
48*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
49visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
50the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
51and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
52visual class names are
53
54 TrueColor
55 PseudoColor
56 DirectColor
57 StaticColor
58 GrayScale
59 StaticGray
60
61Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
62`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
63meaning.
64
65The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
66supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
67`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
68visual.
69
70Example:
71
699238d9 72 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
73
74*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
75specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
76default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
77resource values are `true' or `on'.
78
79Example:
80
699238d9 81 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 82
0d0c76b8
EZ
83** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
84more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
85now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
86
42088c12 87** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 88display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
89shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
90be customized.
c60ea02e 91
31047e0d
DL
92** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
93
b02786f9
GM
94** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
95all frames except the selected one.
96
3261c1d8
DL
97** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
98to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
99
ffe36136
GM
100** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
101the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
102area or with tooltips.
103
559cee90
DL
104** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
105read mail from the menu etc.
106
271b4185
GM
107** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
108a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
109
0daee095
GM
110** Changes in Texinfo mode.
111
112** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
113macros
114
115 Key binding Macro
116 -------------------------
117 C-c C-c C-s @strong
118 C-c C-c C-e @emph
119 C-c C-c u @url
120 C-c C-c q @quotation
121 C-c C-c m @email
122
559cee90
DL
123** Changes in Outline mode.
124
125There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
126`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
127the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
128
404fa7d6
DL
129** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
130groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
131
8964fec7
SM
132** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
133or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
134several other special buffers.
135
39783d73
WP
136** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
137under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
138.emacs file.
139
140The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
141determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
142
d35fce81
GM
143** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
144abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
145`directory-abbrev-alist'.
146
df5a1902
GM
147** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
148is running in batch mode. For example,
149
150 (message "%s" (read t))
151
152will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
153to standard output.
154
a933dad1
DL
155** Faces and frame parameters.
156
157There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
158Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
159`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
160`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
161sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
162for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
163parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
164
165Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
166`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 167`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
168`default' face and vice versa.
169
f77a4a8a
GM
170** New face `menu'.
171
172The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
173Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
174attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
175
a933dad1
DL
176** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
177
178The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
179colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
180correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
181the screen gamma of a frame's display.
182
183PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
184in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
185color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
186
187The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
188`ScreenGamma'.
189
190** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
191
192The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
193Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
194oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
195of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
196the text.
197
198** Emacs has a new face implementation.
199
200The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
201font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
202height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
203These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
204specify a font.
205
206Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
207These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
208under Lisp changes, below.
209
210** New default font is Courier 12pt.
211
212** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
213its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
214it is hollow.
215
216** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
217truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
218foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
219customizing face `fringe'.
220
221** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
222can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
223
224** LessTif support.
225
226Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
227need a version 0.88.1 or later.
228
229** Toolkit scroll bars.
230
231Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
232LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
233configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
234bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
235bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
236Emacs.
237
238When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
239Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
240Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
241Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
242define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
243`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
244
245Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
246a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
247directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
248different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
249system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
250add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
251
252The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
253`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
254This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
255image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
256Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
257
258** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
259
260When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
261widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
262Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
263
264** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
265
266When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
267whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
268defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
269highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
270displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
271whitespace.
272
273** Busy-cursor.
274
275Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
276display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
277
278** Blinking cursor
279
280M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
281terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
282and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
283the group `cursor'.
284
285** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
286
287This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
288generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
289See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
290details.
291
292Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
293have to do anything to activate it.
294
295** Tabs and variable-width text.
296
297Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
298defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
299independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
300Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
301
302** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
303
304*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
305
306 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
307
308The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif
309one.
310
311*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in
312Motif.
313
314** Hscrolling in C code.
315
316Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically.
317
318** Tool bar support.
319
320Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
321how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
322
323** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
324
325Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
326mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
327line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
328about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
329in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
330
331Currently, the following actions have been defined:
332
333- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
334buffers.
335
336- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
337M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
338
339- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
340
559cee90 341- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
342toggles the read-only status.
343
344- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
345
346** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
347
348When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 349from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
350non-nil.
351
352** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
353
354Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
355Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
356the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
357italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
358Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
359attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
360
361** Sound support
362
363Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
364(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
365Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
366(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
367to enable sound support.
368
369** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
370the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
371forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
372value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
373users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
374even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
375
376The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
377
378** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
379
380As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
381drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
382`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
383
384** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
385bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
386
387This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
388`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
389variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
390
391** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
392
393When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
394value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
395number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
396fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
397
398When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
399value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
400number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
401fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
402
403** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
404notably at the end of lines.
405
406All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
407spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
408
eee54b0e
DL
409There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
410
a933dad1
DL
411** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
412query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
413after each match to get the replacement text.
414
415** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
416
417If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
418longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
419on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
420by setting the following variable:
421
422- User option: max-mini-window-height
423
424Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
425fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
426specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
427
428Default is 0.25.
429
0d43b60d
GM
430** Changes to hideshow.el
431
432Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
433selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
434
435*** Generalized block selection and traversal
436
437A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
438(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
439which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
440`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
441point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
442(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
443
444If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
445i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
446backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
447the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
448
449*** Isearch support for updating mode line
450
451During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
452blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
453line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
454portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
455is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
456
457To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
458something like this in your .emacs.
459
460 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
461 (lambda ()
462 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
463
559cee90
DL
464** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
465
466If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
467entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
468log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
469
470New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
471buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
472
473Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
474if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
475
476The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
477expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
478cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
479a file.
480
3476b54a
GM
481** Changes in Font Lock
482
483*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
484font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
485mode.
486
b3b98592
GM
487** Comint (subshell) changes
488
489Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
490and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
491
492The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
493buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
494buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
495
496The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
497M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
498the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
499
e26cec67
GM
500** Changes to Rmail mode
501
c0510d27
GM
502*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
503set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
504receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
505recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
506`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
507as correspondent.
508
509Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
510mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
511regexp matching your mail adresses.
512
3b55acc9
GM
513*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
514to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
515Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
516with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
517for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
518
6a1950ec
GM
519*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
520like `j'.
521
5bb6f079
RS
522*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
523specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 524digest message.
e26cec67 525
400a1ed0
GM
526** Changes to TeX mode
527
528The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
529`latex-mode'.
530
a933dad1
DL
531** Changes to RefTeX mode
532
533*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
534 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
535 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
536 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
537 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
538 can be edited from that buffer.
539
540*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
541 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
542 `A' to use all marked entries).
543
544*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
545 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
546
547*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
548 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
549 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
550 been cited.
551
38de9631
GM
552** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
553The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
554semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
555in column 1 are always made leaves.
556
a933dad1
DL
557** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
558has the following new features:
559
560*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
561may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
562to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
563time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
564
565*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
566feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
567file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
568compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
569pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
570defaults to 1.
571
572** Tooltips.
573
574Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
575mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
576can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
577
578Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
579variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
580the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
581tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
582
583** Customize changes
584
585*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
586`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
587cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
588
589*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
590Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
591default).
592
0ae51efb
GM
593*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
594between custom options. Example:
595
596 (defcustom default-input-method nil
597 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
598 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
599 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
600 :group 'mule
601 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
602 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
603
604This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
605current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
606first in a custom-set-variables statement.
607
a933dad1
DL
608** New features in evaluation commands
609
610The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
611modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
612print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
613customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
614eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
615
a933dad1
DL
616** Dired changes
617
618*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
619command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
620is, delete only empty directories.
621
622*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
623command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
624copy directories recursively.
625
f6737cde
GM
626*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
627in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
628the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
629
a933dad1
DL
630** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
631use the -f option when sending mail.
632
b1c609b1
GM
633** CC mode changes.
634
635Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
636current user setups (although it's believed that these
637incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
638However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
639back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
640compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
641release.
642
643*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
644When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
645variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
646take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
647is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
648settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
649possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
650Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
651
652By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
653special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
654the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
655of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
656above.
657
658Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
659when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
660function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
661call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
662then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
663values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
664only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
665function documentation for more info.
666
667The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
668especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
669with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
670intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
671such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
672is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
673configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
674global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
675
676(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
677
678**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
679This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
680
681This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
682variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
683completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
684the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
685empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
686style system.
687
688**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
689In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
690c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
691as far as possible.
692
693*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
694CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
695surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
696chapter about this in the manual.
697
698**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
699The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
700recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
701primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
702adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
703
704**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
705This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
706c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
707
708**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
709This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
710
711It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
712Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
713A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
714inside CC Mode.
715
716Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
717causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
718the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
719available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
720cc-mode/).
721
722**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
723The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
724specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
725literals.
726
727**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
728It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
729prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
730you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
731this function.
732
733*** Fixes to IDL mode.
734It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
735to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
736struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
737Thanks to Eric Eide.
738
739*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
740It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
741opening braces hangs and when they don't.
742
743**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
744
745*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
746See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
747better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
748and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
749
750*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
751previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
752the column specified by comment-column.
753
754*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
755In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
756is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
757prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
758contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
759don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
760
761*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
762instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
763arguments.
764
765*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
766
767*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
768c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
769c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
770variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
771Provan).
772
773*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
774
c407c570
GM
775** Makefile mode changes
776
777*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
778
779*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
780Fontlock mode is active.
781
87be76f6
GM
782** Isearch changes
783
c407c570
GM
784** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
785respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
786that started the search.
787
87be76f6 788*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
789selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
790
87be76f6
GM
791*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
792
d35fce81 793Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
794`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
795search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
796before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
797highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
798`secondary-selection'.
799
800The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
801will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
802Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
803using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
804usual snappy response.
805
806If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
807matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
808set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
809isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
810
35384f06
GM
811** Changes in sort.el
812
813The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 814as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
815new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
816numeric base.
87be76f6 817
d7b511c4
GM
818** Changes to Ange-ftp
819
820*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
821names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
822sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
823
d7b511c4
GM
824*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
825ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
826
4b9347b3
GM
827** Shell script mode changes.
828
829Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
830derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
831sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
832
79214ddf
FP
833** Etags changes.
834
835*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
836
aca0be23 837*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
838possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
839{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
840This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
841a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 842
79214ddf
FP
843*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
844declarations when given the --declarations option.
845
846*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 847"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
848
849*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
850types.
851
852*** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
853
854*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
855
856*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
857are now tagged.
858
859*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
860variables are tagged.
861
862*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
863
8dc78b52
FP
864*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
865for PSWrap.
79214ddf 866
f6737cde
GM
867** Changes in etags.el
868
3f6e4b8b
GM
869*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
870tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
871is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
872
f6737cde
GM
873*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
874the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
875
876If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
877FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
878TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
879obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
880
881TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
882
883FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
884List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
885
886A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
887
888 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
889 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
890 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
891
892*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
893of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
894
895*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
896names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
897
fbc164de
PE
898** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
899and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
900LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
901
59c1bf85
DL
902** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
903These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
904(Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
905currently no specific input method support for them.
906
e33b0397
DL
907** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
908remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
909appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
910
911** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
912
6f8ea2ae
DL
913** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
914
c0510d27
GM
915** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
916containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
917expression from that list, are not checked.
918
a933dad1
DL
919** New modes and packages
920
5e5dff44
GM
921*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
922authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
923
924The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
925the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
926the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
927Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
928even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
929single step.
930
931On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
932matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
933probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
934contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
935
f7136ee8
GM
936*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
937unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
938actually modifying content of a buffer.
939
bbd9b566
GM
940*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
941PostScript.
942
943Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
944
945The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
946
947 ; comment (until end of line)
948 A non-terminal
949 "C" terminal
950 ?C? special
951 $A default non-terminal
952 $"C" default terminal
953 $?C? default special
954 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
955 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
956 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
957 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
958 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
959 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
960 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
961 C+ one or more occurrences of C
962 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
963 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
964 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
965 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
966 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
967 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
968 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
969
970Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
971
99453a38
GM
972*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
973align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
974determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
975example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
976equal signs of assignments.
977
559cee90
DL
978*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
979paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
980
6448a6b3
GM
981*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
982list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
983buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
984customize the package.
985
249652b1
GM
986*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
987replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
988is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
989and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
990not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
991which answers different needs.
992
3476b54a
GM
993*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
994suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
995expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
996course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
997reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
998to be enabled.
999
8964fec7
SM
1000*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1001containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1002
a933dad1
DL
1003*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1004
1005*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1006
1007*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1008
1009*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1010Pascal) language.
1011
1012*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1013the text at point.
1014
1015*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1016
8d54eb69
DL
1017*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1018
a933dad1
DL
1019*** whitespace.el ???
1020
ebcfda83
GM
1021*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1022files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1023(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1024interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1025often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1026uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1027codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1028
1029*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1030
1031Here is an example of columns:
1032
1033horse apple bus
1034dog pineapple car EXTRA
1035porcupine strawberry airplane
1036
1037Doing the following settings:
1038
1039 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1040 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1041 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1042 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1043
1044
1045Selecting the lines above and typing:
1046
1047 M-x delimit-columns-region
1048
1049It results:
1050
1051[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1052[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1053[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1054
1055delim-col has the following options:
1056
1057 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1058 before all columns.
1059
1060 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1061 between each column.
1062
1063 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1064 after all columns.
1065
1066 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1067 each column.
1068
1069delim-col has the following commands:
1070
1071 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1072 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1073
f507826c
GM
1074*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
1075were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
1076is displayed in the "Files" menu.
1077
1078The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
1079
1080To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
1081
1082To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
1083M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
1084
1085To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
1086M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
1087
8062f458
DL
1088*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1089text.
1090
36e24b82 1091*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1092of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1093specific to Message mode.
1094
36e24b82
DL
1095*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1096viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1097with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1098
aaa659ef
DL
1099*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1100interface to access directory servers using different directory
1101protocols. It has a separate manual.
1102
eee54b0e
DL
1103*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1104for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1105
aaa659ef
DL
1106*** windmove.el
1107
a933dad1
DL
1108** Withdrawn packages
1109
1110*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1111functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1112
3261c1d8
DL
1113*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1114
1115*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
a933dad1
DL
1116\f
1117* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1118
1119Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1120--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1121When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1122so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1123
271b4185
GM
1124** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1125to `window-buffer-height'.
1126
1127- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1128
1129Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1130The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1131lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1132
1133Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1134respectively.
1135
1136If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1137COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1138
1139The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1140obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1141on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1142
1143Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1144buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1145possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1146is currently displayed in some window.
1147
3c30cb6e
DL
1148** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1149argument function's results.
1150
62f20204
GM
1151** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1152signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1153
c0510d27
GM
1154** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1155header is the list of headers passed to it.
1156
1157** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1158ignores differences in case and text representation.
1159
1160** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1161cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1162as follows:
1163
1164 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1165 nil don't display a cursor
1166 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1167 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1168 others display a box cursor.
1169
9a0dd3dc
GM
1170** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1171an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1172defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1173set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1174
d7b511c4
GM
1175** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
1176specificationa in string form as accepted my `modify-syntax-entry' to
1177the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1178text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1179
1180Example:
1181
1182 (string-to-syntax "()")
1183 => (4 . 41)
1184
1fa28578
GM
1185** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1186other than 10.
1187
1188*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1189INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1190
1191 #b1111
1192 => 15
1193 #b-1111
1194 => -15
1195
1196*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1197
1198 #o666
1199 => 438
1200
1201*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1202
1203 #xbeef
1204 => 48815
1205
1206*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1207
1208 #2R-111
1209 => -7
1210 #25rah
1211 => 267
1212
3d4ff2dd 1213** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
e9b4e5ff
GM
1214the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
1215and isn't a string.
1216
3d4ff2dd
GM
1217** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1218a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1219value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1220not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1221
16ce590d
DL
1222+++
1223** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1224
73825616 1225** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1226for a regexp in a string.
1227
1228** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1229`mouse-position-function'.
1230
723e779c
GM
1231** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1232that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1233
d1e103b2
GM
1234** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1235Keywords are now always considered constants.
1236
31047e0d
DL
1237+++
1238** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1239returns it.
1240
7a85e4df
GM
1241** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1242returned by function `recent-keys'.
1243
02b14400
RS
1244+++
1245** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1246can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1247Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1248etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1249mode.
404fa7d6 1250
02b14400 1251+++
8964fec7
SM
1252** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1253and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1254
02b14400
RS
1255+++
1256** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1257has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1258function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1259returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1260been performed."
1261
1262When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1263and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1264hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1265then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1266
02b14400 1267+++
81da8b32
GM
1268** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1269In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1270and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1271
02b14400 1272+++
9e207b90
GM
1273** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1274with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1275specified table.
1276
1277 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1278
1279Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1280TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1281saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1282what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1283
02b14400 1284+++
d7f89643 1285** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1286Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1287
02b14400 1288+++
dde9e75a
GM
1289** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1290removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1291
02b14400 1292+++
9da30515
GM
1293** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1294instead of being optional.
1295
02b14400 1296+++
d20679eb
GM
1297** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1298modify read-only text.
1299
02b14400 1300+++
fbc164de
PE
1301** New functions and variables for locales.
1302
1303The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1304decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1305time functions like strftime. The new variables
1306`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1307locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1308
1309The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1310environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1311the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1312environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1313not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1314`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1315`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1316
02b14400 1317+++
863476d1
SM
1318** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1319To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1320modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1321start sequences.
1322
02b14400 1323+++
ef6d912c
GM
1324** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1325because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1326
02b14400 1327+++
a933dad1
DL
1328** New function `propertize'
1329
1330The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1331strings with text properties.
1332
1333- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1334
1335Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1336by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1337PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1338specified value of that property. Example:
1339
1340 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1341
1342+++
1343** push and pop macros.
1344
02b14400
RS
1345Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1346are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1347as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1348
1349(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1350(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1351 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1352
02b14400
RS
1353** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1354
6c7fd5aa
RS
1355Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1356are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1357
1358(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1359 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1360 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1361 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1362
1363(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1364 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1365 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1366 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1367
a933dad1
DL
1368+++
1369** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1370as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1371
1372[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1373[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1374[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1375[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1376[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1377 space, and DEL.
1378[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1379 and DEL.
1380[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1381 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1382 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1383[:alpha:] matches letters.
1384 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1385 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1386[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1387[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1388[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1389[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1390 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1391 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1392[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1393[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1394[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1395
1396+++
1397** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1398
1399The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1400
1401- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1402
1403The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1404are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1405
1406:test TEST
1407
1408TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1409Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1410it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1411
1412:size SIZE
1413
1414SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1415many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1416
1417:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1418
1419REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1420full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1421size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
14221.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1423old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1424
1425:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1426
1427THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1428hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1429(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1430
1431:weakness WEAK
1432
1433WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
1434Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
1435their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
1436hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
1437
1438- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1439
1440Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1441
1442- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1443
1444Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1445
1446- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1447
1448Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1449values are shared.
1450
1451- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1452
1453Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1454
1455- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1456
1457Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1458
1459- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1460
1461Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1462
1463- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1464
1465Returns the size of TABLE.
1466
1467- Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
1468
1469Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1470
1471- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1472
1473Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1474
1475- Function: clrhash TABLE
1476
1477Clear TABLE.
1478
1479- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1480
1481Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1482not found.
1483
79214ddf 1484- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1485
1486Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1487another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1488
1489- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1490
1491Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1492
1493- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1494
1495Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1496arguments KEY and VALUE.
1497
1498- Function: sxhash OBJ
1499
1500Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1501
1502- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
1503
1504Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
1505a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 1506comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
1507and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
1508of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
1509
1510TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
1511
1512HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
1513code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
1514integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
1515
1516Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
1517be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
1518
1519 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
1520 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
1521
1522 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
1523 (sxhash (upcase a)))
1524
79214ddf 1525 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
1526 'case-fold-string-hash))
1527
1528 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
1529
1530+++
1531** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
1532
1533It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
1534circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
1535a cons cell which is its own cdr.
1536
1537+++
1538** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
1539
1540If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
1541#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
1542
a933dad1
DL
1543+++
1544** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
1545t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
1546specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
1547is too short to reach that column.
1548
1549+++
1550** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
1551now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
1552after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
1553two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
1554
1555If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
1556perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
1557and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
1558
1559+++
1560** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
1561to specify which buffer to return the size of.
1562
1563+++
1564** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
1565calendar-move-hook after moving point.
1566
1567+++
1568** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
1569directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
1570small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
1571small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
1572temporary-file-directory instead.
1573
1574+++
1575** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
1576the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
1577`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
1578hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
1579
1580+++
1581** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
1582elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
1583
1584+++
1585** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
1586
1587make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
1588creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
1589ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
1590
1591+++
1592** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
1593
1594The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
1595on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
1596is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
1597never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
1598ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
1599overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
1600
1601If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
1602that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
1603to get an error if the file exists at that time.
1604The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
1605
1606+++
1607** Function `format' now handles text properties.
1608
1609Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
1610If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
1611ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
1612result string.
1613
1614Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
1615string where arguments appear in the result string.
1616
1617Example:
1618
1619 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
1620 (s2 "world"))
1621 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
1622 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 1623 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
1624
1625results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
1626
1627+++
1628** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
1629
1630Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
1631The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
1632argument in it.
1633
1634 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
1635 (arg "world"))
1636 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
1637 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
1638 (message msg arg))
1639
1640+++
1641** Sound support
1642
1643Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
1644(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
1645
1646Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
1647(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
1648to enable sound support.
1649
1650Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
1651list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
1652when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
1653functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
1654sound to play, before playing the sound.
1655
1656The following sound properties are supported:
1657
1658- `:file FILE'
1659
1660FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
1661searched relative to `data-directory'.
1662
6fb40beb
GM
1663- `:data DATA'
1664
1665DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
1666may be present, but not both.
1667
a933dad1
DL
1668- `:volume VOLUME'
1669
1670VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
16710..1. This property is optional.
1672
1673Other properties are ignored.
1674
1675** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
1676
1677** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
1678a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
1679
1680** Changes to garbage collection
1681
1682*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
1683of live and free strings.
1684
1685*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
1686strings that have been consed so far.
1687
a933dad1
DL
1688\f
1689* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
1690
1691Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1692--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1693When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1694so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1695
f6d3257b
GM
1696** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
1697to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
1698
1699Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
1700text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
1701is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
1702your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
1703laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
1704just display it black instead.
1705
1706This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
1707a line like
1708
1709 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
1710
1711in your `.emacs'.
1712
a933dad1
DL
1713** New face implementation.
1714
1715Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
1716font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
1717
1718+++
1719*** New faces.
1720
1721Each face can specify the following display attributes:
1722
1723 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 1724
a933dad1
DL
1725 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
1726 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 1727
a933dad1 1728 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 1729
a933dad1 1730 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 1731
a933dad1 1732 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 1733
a933dad1 1734 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 1735
a933dad1
DL
1736 7. Background color.
1737
1738 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
1739
1740 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
1741
1742 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
1743
1744 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
1745
1746 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
1747 color.
1748
1749 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
1750 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
1751
1752Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
1753same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
1754frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
1755faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
1756with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
1757attributes mentioned above.
1758
1759There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
1760definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
1761created frames.
79214ddf 1762
a933dad1
DL
1763A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
1764have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
1765`fully-specified'.
1766
1767+++
1768*** Face merging.
1769
1770The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
1771combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
1772aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
1773properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
1774that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
1775results in a fully-specified face.
1776
1777+++
1778*** Face realization.
1779
1780After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
1781merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
1782realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
1783available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
1784face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
1785cache of the frame on which it was realized.
1786
1787Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
1788character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
1789for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
1790charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
1791
1792Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
1793specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
1794being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
1795the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
1796statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
1797
1798In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
1799`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
18000x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
1801the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
1802initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
1803Emacs.
1804
1805Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
1806`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
1807registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
1808with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
1809
1810++++
1811**** Clearing face caches.
1812
1813The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
1814on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
1815unused fonts.
1816
1817+++
1818*** Font selection.
79214ddf 1819
a933dad1
DL
1820Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
1821given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
1822for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
1823
1824If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
1825pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
1826family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
1827property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
1828an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
1829
1830Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
1831against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
1832match for the given face attributes in this font list.
1833
1834Font selection can be influenced by the user.
1835
1836The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
1837attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
1838face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
1839names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
1840that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
1841width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
1842to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
1843
1844Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
1845specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
1846face doesn't exist.
1847
1848+++
1849**** Scalable fonts
1850
1851Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
1852since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
1853servers.
1854
1855To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 1856`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
1857scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
1858Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
1859scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
1860that list. Example:
1861
1862 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
1863
1864allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
1865
1866+++
1867*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
1868
1869- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
1870
1871Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
1872is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
1873string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
1874
1875If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
1876the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
1877FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
1878POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
1879SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
1880These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
1881if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
1882REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
1883the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
1884of the face font sort order.
1885
79214ddf 1886- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
1887
1888Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
1889omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
1890(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
1891non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
1892
1893- Variable: font-list-limit
1894
1895Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
1896won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
1897matching font. The default is currently 100.
1898
1899+++
1900*** Setting face attributes.
1901
1902For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
1903with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
1904implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
1905`face-attribute'.
1906
1907Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
1908symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
1909
1910The following attributes are recognized:
1911
1912`:family'
1913
1914VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
1915or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
1916and `?' are allowed.
1917
1918`:width'
1919
1920VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
1921It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
1922`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
1923`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
1924
1925`:height'
1926
1927VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
19281/10 pt.
1929
1930`:weight'
1931
1932VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
1933symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
1934`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
1935
1936`:slant'
1937
1938VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
1939symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
1940`reverse-oblique'.
1941
1942`:foreground', `:background'
1943
1944VALUE must be a color name, a string.
1945
1946`:underline'
1947
1948VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
1949VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
1950a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
1951don't underline.
1952
1953`:overline'
1954
1955VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
1956VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
1957string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
1958overline.
1959
1960`:strike-through'
1961
1962VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
1963striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
1964face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
1965is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
1966
1967`:box'
1968
1969VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
1970around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
1971VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
1972of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
1973and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
1974VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
1975:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
1976the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
1977specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
1978defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
1979the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
1980color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
1981should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
1982like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
1983that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
1984the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
1985box.
1986
1987`:inverse-video'
1988
1989VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
1990inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
1991
1992`:stipple'
1993
1994If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
1995The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
1996searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
1997HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
1998is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
1999explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2000
2001For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2002and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2003
2004`:font'
2005
2006Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2007XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2008is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2009versions of Emacs.
2010
2011For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2012be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2013must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2014
2015Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2016`defface'.
2017
2018*** Face attributes and X resources
2019
2020The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2021from X resources:
2022
2023 Face attribute X resource class
2024-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2025 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2026 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2027 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2028 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2029 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2030 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2031 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2032 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2033 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2034 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2035 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2036 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2037 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2038 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2039 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2040 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2041 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2042 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2043 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2044
2045+++
2046*** Text property `face'.
2047
2048The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2049specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2050specification can be
2051
20521. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2053
20542. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2055 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2056 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2057 for face attribute names.
2058
20593. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2060 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2061 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2062
2063+++
2064** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2065
acf3ecb7
EZ
2066The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2067on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2068the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2069default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2070`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2071used to clear the mapping table.
2072
acf3ecb7
EZ
2073** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2074
2075The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2076and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2077type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2078color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2079display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2080old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2081`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2082compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2083should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2084modify their color-related behavior.
2085
2086The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2087any frame type.
2088
8a5719f0
EZ
2089** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2090
2091The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2092`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2093`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2094`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2095`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2096`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2097display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2098the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2099platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2100
a933dad1
DL
2101+++
2102** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2103
463cac2d 2104This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2105
2106The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2107end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2108Otherwise, it returns zero.
2109
463cac2d
GM
2110** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2111
2112There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2113buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
2114text-property.
2115
9a9dfda8 2116Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2117forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2118to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2119not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2120commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2121boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2122`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2123functions.
463cac2d
GM
2124
2125Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2126a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2127editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2128
9a9dfda8
GM
2129The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2130
2131- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
2132
2133Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
2134A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2135If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2136constrained position if that is is different.
2137
2138If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2139positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2140ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
2141constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
2142as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2143is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
2144fields.
2145
2146If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2147NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2148unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2149C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2150only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2151
2152- Function: erase-field &optional POS
2153
2154Erases the field surrounding POS.
2155A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2156If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2157
2158- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2159
2160Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2161A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2162If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2163If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
2164field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2165
2166- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2167
2168Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2169A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2170If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2171If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
2172then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2173
2174- Function: field-string &optional POS
2175
2176Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2177A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2178If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2179
2180- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2181
2182Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2183A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2184If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
2185
a933dad1
DL
2186+++
2187** Image support.
2188
2189Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2190strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2191(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2192replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2193
2194If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2195`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2196AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2197window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2198area.
2199
2200IMAGE is an image specification.
2201
2202*** Image specifications
2203
2204Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2205is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2206specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2207symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2208described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2209
2210The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2211
2212`:ascent ASCENT'
2213
2214ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
2215of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
2216
2217`:margin MARGIN'
2218
79214ddf 2219MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2220margin around the image. Default is 0.
2221
2222`:relief RELIEF'
2223
2224RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2225around an image.
2226
2227`:algorithm ALGO'
2228
2229Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2230be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2231supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2232which is intended to display images "disabled."
2233
2234`:heuristic-mask BG'
2235
2236If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2237background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2238determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2239corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2240the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2241be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2242background of the image.
2243
2244`:file FILE'
2245
2246Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2247search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2248building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2249may be present in the image specification.
2250
518df5c4
GM
2251`:data DATA'
2252
2253Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2254supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2255present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2256support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2257
a933dad1
DL
2258*** Supported image types
2259
b246b1f6 2260**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2261
2262XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2263properties supported are
2264
2265`:foreground FG'
2266
2267FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2268is the frame's foreground.
2269
2270`:background FG'
2271
2272BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2273the frame's background color.
2274
2275XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2276case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2277instead of a `:file' property.
2278
2279`:width WIDTH'
2280
2281WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2282
2283`:height HEIGHT'
2284
2285HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2286
2287`:data DATA'
2288
2289DATA must be either
2290
2291 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2292 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2293
2294 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2295
2296 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2297 bitmap.
2298
2299**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2300
2301XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2302`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2303found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2304`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2305
2306Additional image properties supported are:
2307
2308`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2309
2310SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2311name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2312name.
2313
2314XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2315add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2316
a933dad1
DL
2317The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2318to display compressed images.
2319
2320**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2321
2322PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2323mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2324defined.
2325
2326**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2327
2328Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2329package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2330are:
2331
a933dad1
DL
2332**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2333
2334Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2335package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2336properties defined.
2337
2338**** GIF, image type `gif'
2339
2340Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2341`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2342
2343Additional image properties supported are:
2344
2345`:index INDEX'
2346
2347INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2348multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2349
2350This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2351For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2352at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2353every 0.1 seconds.
2354
2355(defun show-anim (file max)
2356 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2357 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2358
2359(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2360 (when (= idx max)
2361 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2362 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2363 (save-excursion
2364 (set-buffer buffer)
2365 (goto-char (point-min))
2366 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2367 (insert-image img "x"))
2368 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2369
2370**** PNG, image type `png'
2371
2372Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2373package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2374properties defined.
2375
2376**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2377
2378Additional image properties supported are:
2379
2380`:pt-width WIDTH'
2381
2382WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2383integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2384
2385`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2386
2387HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2388must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2389
2390`:bounding-box BOX'
2391
2392BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2393the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2394files. This is an required property.
2395
2396Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2397lisp/gs.el.
2398
2399*** Lisp interface.
2400
79214ddf
FP
2401The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2402which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2403
2404Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2405they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2406The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
2407manually.
2408
2409*** Simplified image API, image.el
2410
2411The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2412creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2413can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2414define an image based on available image types. The functions
2415`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2416buffer.
2417
2418+++
2419** Display margins.
2420
2421Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2422and images.
2423
2424To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2425`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2426`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2427obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2428`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2429the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2430of the display margins.
2431
2432You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2433containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2434one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2435string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2436in this file).
2437
2438+++
2439** Help display
2440
2441Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2442moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2443`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2444that have a `help-echo' property.
2445
2446The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
2447items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
2448If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
2449evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
2450tool-bar item is used.
2451
2452The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
2453help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
2454help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
2455
2456+++
2457** Vertical fractional scrolling.
2458
2459The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
2460This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
2461
2462The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
2463scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
2464The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
2465scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
2466used.
2467
79214ddf
FP
2468 (global-set-key [A-down]
2469 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 2470 (interactive)
79214ddf 2471 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 2472 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 2473 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
2474 #'(lambda ()
2475 (interactive)
79214ddf 2476 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
2477 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
2478
2479+++
2480** New hook `fontification-functions'.
2481
2482Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
2483when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
2484variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
2485is called with one argument, POS.
2486
2487At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
2488characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
2489as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
2490property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
2491`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
2492
2493+++
2494** Tool bar support.
2495
2496Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
2497parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
2498controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
2499suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
2500`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
2501automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
2502
2503*** Tool bar item definitions
2504
2505Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
2506`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
2507where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 2508
a933dad1
DL
2509CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
2510evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
2511the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
2512property (see below).
79214ddf 2513
a933dad1
DL
2514BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
2515binding are currently ignored.
2516
2517The following properties are recognized:
2518
2519`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 2520
a933dad1
DL
2521FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
2522or disabled.
79214ddf 2523
a933dad1 2524`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 2525
a933dad1 2526FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 2527
a933dad1
DL
2528`:filter FUNCTION'
2529
2530FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
2531FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
2532used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 2533
a933dad1
DL
2534`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
2535
2536TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
2537and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 2538
a933dad1
DL
2539`:image IMAGES'
2540
2541IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
2542image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
2543meaning of each of the four elements:
2544
2545 Index Use when item is
2546 ----------------------------------------
2547 0 enabled and selected
2548 1 enabled and deselected
2549 2 disabled and selected
2550 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 2551
a933dad1 2552`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 2553
a933dad1
DL
2554Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
2555is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
2556
2557*** Tool-bar-related variables.
2558
2559If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
2560resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
2561than 1/4 of the frame's size.
2562
79214ddf 2563If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
2564raised when the mouse moves over them.
2565
2566You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
2567`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
2568pixels. Default is 1.
2569
2570You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
2571`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
2572
2573*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
2574
2575You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 2576a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
2577
2578 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
2579 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
2580 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
2581
2582is the original tool bar item definition, then
2583
2584 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
2585
2586makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
2587item.
2588
2589** Mode line changes.
2590
2591+++
2592*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
2593
2594The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
2595that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
2596a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
2597
25981. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
2599a `local-map' text property.
2600
26012. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
2602that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
2603
26043. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
2605is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
2606`local-map' property.
2607
2608The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
2609properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
2610example.
2611
54522c9f
GM
2612*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
2613evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
2614
a933dad1
DL
2615+++
2616*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
2617variable mode-line-format to nil.
2618
2619+++
2620*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
2621
2622This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
2623`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
2624completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
2625`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
2626line.
2627
2628The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
2629`header-line'.
2630
2631The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
2632position in the header-line.
2633
2634+++
2635** Text property `display'
2636
2637The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
2638also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
2639`display' property should be a display specification, as described
2640below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
2641
2642*** Variable width and height spaces
2643
2644To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
2645specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
2646`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
2647area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
2648marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
2649displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
2650simpler form STRETCH as property value.
2651
2652The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
2653PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
2654properties described below.
2655
2656The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
2657characters having the `display' property.
2658
2659- :width WIDTH
2660
2661Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
2662character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
2663
2664- :relative-width FACTOR
2665
2666Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
2667first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
2668same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
2669width of that character by FACTOR.
2670
2671- :align-to HPOS
2672
2673Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
2674value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
2675
2676Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
2677
2678- :height HEIGHT
2679
2680Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
2681normal line height.
2682
2683- :relative-height FACTOR
2684
2685The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
2686of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
2687
2688- :ascent ASCENT
2689
2690Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
2691used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
2692baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
2693equal to 100.
2694
2695You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
2696
2697*** Images
2698
2699A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
2700. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
2701in the display, the characters having this display specification in
2702their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
2703the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
2704`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
2705area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
2706the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
2707as display specification.
2708
2709*** Other display properties
2710
2711- :space-width FACTOR
2712
2713Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
2714should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
2715integer or float.
2716
2717- :height HEIGHT
2718
2719Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
2720
2721If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
2722means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
2723the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
2724``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
2725a font is available counts as a step.
2726
2727If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
2728as tall as the frame's default font.
2729
2730If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
2731height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
2732
2733Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
2734`height' bound to the current specified font height.
2735
2736- :raise FACTOR
2737
2738FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
2739font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
2740raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
2741amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
2742`:height' subproperty.
2743
2744*** Conditional display properties
2745
2746All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
2747has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
2748applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
2749During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
2750the text having the `display' property.
2751
2752The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
2753`(:when t SPEC)'.
2754
2755+++
2756** New menu separator types.
2757
2758Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
2759item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
2760treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
2761to specify other menu separator types.
2762
2763- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
2764
2765No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
2766separator occurs.
2767
2768- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
2769
2770A single line in the menu's foreground color.
2771
2772- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
2773
2774A double line in the menu's foreground color.
2775
2776- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
2777
2778A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2779
2780- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
2781
2782A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
2783
2784- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
2785
2786A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
2787displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
2788
2789- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
2790
2791A single line with 3D raised appearance.
2792
2793- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
2794
2795A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
2796
2797- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
2798
2799A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
2800
2801- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
2802
2803Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2804
2805- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
2806
2807Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
2808
2809- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
2810
2811Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
2812
2813- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
2814
2815Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
2816
2817Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
2818the corresponding single-line separators.
2819
2820+++
2821** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
2822
2823The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
2824`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
2825Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
2826that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
2827default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
2828default background is the background color of the frame, and the
2829default foreground is black.
2830
2831The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
2832(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
2833`ScrollBarBackground').
2834
2835Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
2836settings for scroll bar colors.
2837
2838+++
2839** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
2840display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
2841
2842---
2843** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
2844starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
2845on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
2846line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
2847the original window start.
2848
2849---
2850** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
2851`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
2852now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
2853
2854+++
2855** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
2856
2857A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
2858`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
2859windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
2860other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
2861
2862The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
2863fixed-width and fixed-height.
2864
2865 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
2866
2867A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
2868fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
2869window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
2870change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
2871temporarily to nil, for example
2872
2873 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
2874 (enlarge-window 10))
2875
79214ddf 2876Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 2877or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
2878
2879** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
2880terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
2881to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
2882overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
2883horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
2884support a vertical-bar cursor).
e33b0397
DL
2885^L
2886* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
2887
2888** Not new, but not mentioned before:
2889M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
a933dad1
DL
2890\f
2891* Changes in Emacs 20.4
2892
2893** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
2894
2895You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
2896Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
2897`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
2898
2899If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
2900is the one that is used.
2901
2902** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
2903the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
2904Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
2905separate from the command's regular output.
2906Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
2907says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
2908In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
2909the buffer name.
2910
2911When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
2912output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
2913it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
2914cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
2915
2916** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
2917the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
2918is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
2919created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
2920
2921** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
2922example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
2923match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
2924quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
2925
2926** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
2927now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
2928if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
2929they never ignore case.
2930
2931** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
2932under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
2933applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
2934of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
2935just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
2936convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
2937part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
2938
2939If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
2940the same format that was used in the file before.
2941
2942You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
2943`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
2944
2945** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
2946renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
2947This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
2948
2949** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
2950The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
2951buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
2952your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
2953is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
2954end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
2955Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
2956
2957The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
2958eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
2959control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
2960format. You can now customize these variables.
2961
2962** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
2963filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
2964filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
2965enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
2966
2967** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
2968in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
2969windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
2970
2971** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
2972dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
2973doesn't have any effect.
2974
2975** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
2976not one per buffer.
2977
2978** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
2979use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
2980 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
2981
2982** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
2983To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
2984`auto-show-mode' command.
2985
2986** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
2987avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
2988versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
2989choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
2990occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
2991
2992** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
2993cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
2994
2995** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
2996character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
2997feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
2998
2999** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3000the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3001interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3002and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3003
3004** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3005
3006The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3007that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3008one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3009codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3010set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3011
3012Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3013from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3014
3015IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3016equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3017a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3018`?' on other systems.
3019
3020IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3021feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3022Unix.
3023
3024Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3025current codepage when it starts.
3026
3027** Mail changes
3028
feab4fba
GM
3029*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3030`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3031appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3032non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3033MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3034headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3035latin-1:
3036
3037 MIME-version: 1.0
3038 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3039 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3040
a933dad1
DL
3041*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3042default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3043default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3044sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3045buffer-file-coding-system.
3046
3047You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3048sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3049mail.
3050
3051*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3052if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3053Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3054list of possible coding systems.
3055
3056** CC Mode changes
3057
3058*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3059modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3060longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3061docstring for details.
3062
3063*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3064symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3065found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3066prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3067lineup functions use this feature currently.
3068
3069*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3070"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3071
3072*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3073"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3074
3075*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3076from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3077symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3078c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3079anonymous classes.
3080
3081*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3082syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3083
3084*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3085inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3086support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3087function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3088
3089*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3090(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3091brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3092c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3093(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3094
3095*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3096
3097*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3098
3099*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3100for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3101
3102*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3103
3104*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3105associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3106This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3107circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3108class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3109
3110** Gnus changes.
3111
3112*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3113added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3114Gnus manual for the full story.
3115
3116*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3117before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3118group, which is created automatically.
3119
3120*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3121values.
3122
3123*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3124
3125*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3126outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3127
3128*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3129`C-u C-c C-c'.
3130
3131*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3132
3133*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3134re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3135
3136*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3137
3138*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3139Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3140
3141*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3142`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3143
3144*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3145control over simplification.
3146
3147*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3148
3149*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3150limit.
3151
3152*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3153
3154*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3155
79214ddf 3156*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
a933dad1
DL
3157If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3158rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3159
3160*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3161`a' forces normal posting method.
3162
3163*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3164-- `W d'.
3165
3166*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3167to a non-nil value.
3168
3169*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3170where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3171
3172*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3173has been added.
3174
3175*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3176
3177*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3178
3179*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3180`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3181
3182*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3183`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3184
3185*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3186
3187*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3188been added.
3189
3190*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3191`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3192
3193*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3194updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3195
3196*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3197
3198*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3199
3200*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3201
3202** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3203
3204*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3205options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3206nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3207
3208*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3209TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3210of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3211TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3212can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3213
3214*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3215All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3216but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3217the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3218
3219*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3220the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3221buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3222mismatch.
3223
3224** Changes to RefTeX mode
3225
3226*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3227file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3228
3229*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3230lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3231characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3232removed from the label.
3233
3234*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3235a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3236
3237*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3238customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3239
3240*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3241`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
79214ddf 3242expressions.
a933dad1
DL
3243
3244*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3245
3246** New/deleted modes and packages
3247
3248*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3249SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3250
3251*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3252editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3253SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3254
3255*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3256changes with a special face.
3257
3258*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3259this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3260Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3261\f
3262* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3263
3264** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3265This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3266conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3267and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3268check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3269
3270The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3271Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3272distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3273
3274** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3275MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3276controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3277directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3278Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3279on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3280string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3281program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3282printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3283
3284** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3285output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3286available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3287input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3288temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3289program.
3290
3291An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3292and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3293programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3294automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3295as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3296ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3297
3298** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3299a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3300MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3301was not documented clearly before.
3302
3303** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3304This includes Tetris and Snake.
3305\f
3306* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3307
3308** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3309return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3310They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3311meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3312
3313** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3314WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3315and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3316
3317** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3318
3319*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3320It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3321
3322*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3323the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3324integers.
3325
3326** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3327files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3328arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3329file names and attributes are returned.
3330
3331** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3332sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3333accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3334It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3335returns the result.
3336
3337** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3338to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3339
3340** New functions for base64 conversion:
3341
3342The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3343into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3344performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3345optionally.
3346
3347Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3348job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3349
3350**
3351The new function process-running-child-p
3352will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3353terminal to its own child process.
3354
3355** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3356when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3357to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3358itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3359
3360** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3361be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3362
3363** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3364:included is an alias for :visible.
3365
3366easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3367easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3368to move or copy menu entries.
3369
3370** Multibyte editing changes
3371
3372*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3373an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3374make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3375work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3376char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3377 (setq char (sref str idx)
3378 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3379The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3380
3381If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3382(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3383 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3384
3385*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3386region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3387deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3388
3389 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3390
3391This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3392across the boundary.
3393
3394*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3395`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3396 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3397 contains 8-bit characters.
3398 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3399 contains invalid characters.
3400
3401*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
3402text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
3403preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
3404text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
3405way.
3406
3407*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
3408If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
3409end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
3410prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
3411
3412*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
3413compose Thai characters in a string.
3414
3415** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
3416argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
3417for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
3418menus should always use the third argument.
3419
3420** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
3421read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
3422arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
3423input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
3424
3425** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
3426of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
3427programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
3428inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
3429
3430** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
3431the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
3432returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
3433echo area contents.
3434
3435 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
3436
3437** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
3438NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
3439requested feature cannot be loaded.
3440
3441** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
3442foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
79214ddf 3443means to clear out that attribute.
a933dad1
DL
3444
3445** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
3446gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
3447
3448** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
3449read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
3450unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
3451end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
3452
3453** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
3454the gap of the current buffer.
3455
3456** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
3457to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
3458current buffer.
3459
3460** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
3461facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
3462These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
3463it back in after any modifications have been made.
3464\f
3465* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
3466
3467** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
3468the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
3469/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
3470directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
3471subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
3472
3473Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
3474names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
3475Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
3476which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
3477these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
3478
3479Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
3480starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
3481time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
3482
3483This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
3484Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
3485to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
3486subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
3487`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
3488results.
3489
3490** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
3491GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
3492that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
3493fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
3494\f
3495* Changes in Emacs 20.3
3496
3497** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
3498including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
3499it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
3500perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
3501
3502** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
3503specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
3504region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
3505further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
3506command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
3507within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
3508are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
3509region.
3510
3511In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
3512selective undo.
3513
3514** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
3515unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
3516buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
3517effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
3518Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
3519
3520The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
3521though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
3522-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
3523load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
3524
3525** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
3526no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
3527enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
3528something that most users not do.
3529
3530** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
3531operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
3532The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
3533applications.
3534
3535C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
3536pasting operations.
3537
3538** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
3539setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
3540like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
3541printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
3542`ps-printer-name'.
3543
3544** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
3545minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
3546any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
3547except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
3548incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
3549hits a new word.
3550
3551Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
3552Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
3553to be confused by TeX commands.
3554
3555You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
3556correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
3557clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
3558of various alternative replacements and actions.
3559
3560Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
3561the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
3562corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
3563alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
3564flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
3565
3566Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
3567flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
3568
3569** Changes in input method usage.
3570
3571Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
3572the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
3573respectively.
3574
3575You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
3576
3577If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
3578of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
3579
3580The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
3581that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
3582
3583 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
3584
3585 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
3586
3587 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
3588 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
3589
3590 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
79214ddf 3591 given in the following case:
a933dad1
DL
3592 o When you are using a complex input method.
3593 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
3594
3595If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
3596input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
3597and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
3598setting it to t is helpful.
3599
3600The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
3601
3602In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
3603keys:
3604 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
3605 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
3606 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
3607These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
3608environment.
3609
3610** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
3611names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
3612minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
3613get
3614
3615 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
3616
3617which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
3618
3619Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
3620Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
3621
3622** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
3623at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
3624its owner and group.
3625
3626** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
3627Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
3628
3629** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
3630contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
3631
3632** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
3633which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
3634in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
3635by the left edge of the rectangle.
3636
3637** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
3638increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
3639C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
3640for writing keyboard macros.
3641
3642** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
3643files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
3644frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
3645the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
3646additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
3647info.
3648
3649** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
3650
3651** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
3652query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
3653contents only.
3654
3655** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
3656confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
3657the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
3658says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
3659
3660** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
3661non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
3662literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
3663
3664** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
3665now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
3666Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
3667inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
3668
3669** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
3670failure if the command produces no output.
3671
3672** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
3673manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
3674the mouse.
3675
3676** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
3677mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
3678function and variable names.
3679
3680** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
3681reading specific files. This has higher priority than
3682file-coding-system-alist.
3683
3684** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
3685t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
3686converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
3687the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
3688according to the current fontset.
3689
3690** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
3691
3692The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
3693that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
3694nonascii-insert-offset.
3695
3696For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
3697enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
3698nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
3699characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
3700
3701** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
3702an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
3703
3704** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
3705letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
3706
3707** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
3708are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
3709command keys.
3710
3711** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
3712user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
3713
3714Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
3715user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
3716all variables that have documentation.
3717
3718** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
3719shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
3720that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
3721minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
3722it should show; the default is 20.
3723
3724Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
3725the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
3726of your input.
3727
3728** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
3729all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
3730recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
3731argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
3732the customizable options which were changed since that version.
3733Newly added options are included as well.
3734
3735If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
3736then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
3737for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
3738
3739This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
3740Customize menu.
3741
3742** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
3743the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
3744
3745** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
3746buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
3747invoked.
3748
3749** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
3750that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
3751The default is 1.
3752
3753** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
3754syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
3755new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
3756(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
3757sensibly.
3758
3759** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
3760
3761** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
3762value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
3763two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
3764
3765** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
3766reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
3767for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
3768every night.
3769
3770** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
3771the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
3772
3773** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
3774read and post multi-lingual articles.
3775
3776** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
3777doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
3778be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
3779outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
3780the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
79214ddf 3781made invisible again.
a933dad1
DL
3782
3783** Mail reading and sending changes
3784
3785*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
3786the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
3787changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
3788toggle.
3789
3790*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
3791now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
3792summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
3793the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
3794rmail-default-body-file.
3795
3796*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
3797longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
3798handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
3799
3800*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
3801it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
3802is evaluated to insert the signature.
3803
3804*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
3805outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
3806handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
3807putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
3808transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
3809especially interested in trying feedmail.
3810
3811feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
3812feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
3813provided by feedmail are:
3814
3815**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
3816stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
3817there is also a queue for draft messages
3818
3819**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
3820be prompted for confirmation
3821
3822**** does smart filling of address headers
3823
3824**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
3825the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
3826can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
3827
3828**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
3829the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
3830/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
3831function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
3832
3833** Dired changes
3834
3835*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
3836files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
3837
3838*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
3839run Dired on the directory name at point.
3840
3841*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
3842files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
3843for a specified regexp.
3844
3845** VC Changes
3846
3847*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
3848conveniently.
3849
3850*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
3851faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
3852Dired.
3853
3854VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
3855directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
3856listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
3857currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
3858
3859You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
3860then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
3861vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
3862control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
3863on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
3864
3865All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
3866is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
3867`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
3868the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
3869`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
3870
3871The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
3872toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
79214ddf 3873VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
a933dad1
DL
3874`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
3875
3876Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
3877ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
3878command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
3879
3880*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
3881file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
3882session to resolve them.
3883
3884Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
3885resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
3886contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
3887uses as well).
3888
3889*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
3890command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
3891you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
3892either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
3893branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
3894If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
3895using ediff.
3896
3897** Changes in Font Lock
3898
3899*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
3900are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
3901use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
3902unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
3903compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
3904
3905** Frame name display changes
3906
3907*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
3908frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
3909raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
3910when many frames are invisible or iconified.
3911
3912*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
3913frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
3914menu.
3915
3916** Comint (subshell) changes
3917
3918*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
3919subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
3920with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
3921
3922*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
3923
3924C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
3925that is, the line after the last line you got.
3926You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
3927
3928C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
3929send the current line together with the following line, when you send
3930the following line.
3931
3932C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
3933which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
3934previously sent input.
3935
3936C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
3937it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
3938as the search string.
3939
3940*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
3941automatically in compilation-mode windows.
3942
3943** C mode changes
3944
3945*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
3946and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
3947assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
79214ddf 3948definition.
a933dad1
DL
3949
3950*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
3951(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
3952Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
3953style is still the default however.
3954
3955*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
3956
3957*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
3958are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
3959them. They do not have key bindings by default.
3960
3961*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
3962and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
3963
3964*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
3965namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
3966
3967*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
3968makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
3969
3970*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
3971c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
3972
3973*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
3974should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
3975package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
3976variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
3977
3978** Changes to hippie-expand.
3979
79214ddf 3980*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
a933dad1
DL
3981non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
3982which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
3983
3984*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
3985non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
3986expanding dynamically.
3987
3988*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
3989non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
3990
3991*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
3992non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
3993this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
3994expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
3995
3996*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
3997
3998** Changes in BibTeX mode.
3999
4000*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4001bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4002automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4003bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4004against the first word in the title.
4005
4006*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4007capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4008bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
79214ddf 4009lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
a933dad1 4010lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
79214ddf 4011bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
a933dad1
DL
4012
4013*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4014generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4015replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4016bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4017
4018** Changes in vcursor.el.
4019
4020*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4021and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4022variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4023entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4024`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4025in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4026
4027*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4028Editing group once the package is loaded.
4029
4030*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4031generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4032vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4033
4034*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4035vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4036
4037** Ispell changes.
4038
79214ddf
FP
4039*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4040buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
a933dad1
DL
4041are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4042
4043*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4044A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4045and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4046defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
79214ddf 4047include:
a933dad1
DL
4048
4049 o URLs are automatically skipped
4050 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4051
4052*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4053
4054** Changes to RefTeX mode
4055
4056RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4057large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4058re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4059section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4060
4061*** New recursive parser.
4062
4063The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4064entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4065recursive parser scans the individual files.
4066
4067*** Parsing only part of a document.
79214ddf 4068
a933dad1
DL
4069Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4070partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4071the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4072
4073 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4074
4075*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4076
4077This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4078
4079 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4080
4081*** Using multiple selection buffers
4082
4083If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4084for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4085
4086 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4087
4088*** References to external documents.
4089
4090The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4091documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4092documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4093macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4094RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4095the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4096The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4097
4098*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4099
4100The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4101and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4102
4103Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4104the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4105
4106*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4107
4108The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4109buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4110
4111*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4112
4113The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4114contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4115`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4116have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4117enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4118at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4119more.
4120
4121*** Support for the varioref package
4122
4123The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4124
4125*** New hooks
4126
4127Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4128and citations are created. These hooks are
4129`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4130`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4131
4132*** Citations outside LaTeX
4133
4134The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4135a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4136
4137*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4138
4139The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4140fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4141fontified, use
4142
4143 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4144
4145** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4146With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4147the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4148directories that contain the same file name.
4149
4150Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4151Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4152file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4153Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4154have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4155names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4156directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4157directory.
4158
4159** New modes and packages
4160
4161*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4162It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4163it, but some do not.
4164
4165*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4166code.
4167
4168*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4169current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4170around in a buffer.
4171
4172Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4173
4174*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4175uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4176be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4177established system of notation similar to Chess.
4178
4179*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4180documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4181guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4182
4183*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4184available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4185system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4186simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4187functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4188the like.
4189
4190*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4191identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4192
4193*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4194within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4195used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4196the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4197
4198*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4199
4200 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4201 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4202 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4203 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4204 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4205 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4206 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4207 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4208 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4209 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4210 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4211
4212 Platform-specific modes:
4213
4214 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4215 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4216 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4217 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4218 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4219 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4220 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4221 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4222 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4223\f
4224* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4225
4226** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4227use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4228That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4229Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4230
4231Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4232you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4233consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4234
4235** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4236and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4237specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4238searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4239
4240** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4241multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4242character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4243environment.
4244
4245** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4246take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4247string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4248current input method for reading this one event.
4249
4250** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4251now control whether to output certain characters as
4252backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4253non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4254characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4255in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4256\f
4257* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4258
4259** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4260of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4261
4262** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4263in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4264always increases point by 1.
4265
4266The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4267considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4268
4269See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4270
4271** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4272Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4273default value changed. For example,
4274
4275 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4276 :type 'integer
4277 :group 'foo
4278 :version "20.3")
4279
79214ddf 4280 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
a933dad1
DL
4281 :version "20.3")
4282
4283If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4284default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4285is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4286`:version' in the top level group.
4287
4288This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4289
4290** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4291starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4292
4293However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4294symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4295support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4296to themselves.
4297
4298If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4299this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4300values whatever.
4301
4302** There is a new debugger command, R.
4303It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4304in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4305
4306** Frame-local variables.
4307
4308You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4309the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4310local bindings for that variable.
4311
4312These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4313frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4314modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4315parameter name.
4316
4317Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4318Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4319active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4320that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4321
4322It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4323clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4324very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4325through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4326
4327** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4328"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4329evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4330makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4331See the documentation in sregex.el.
4332
4333** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4334is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4335parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4336The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4337
4338** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4339If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4340
4341** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4342known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4343define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4344
4345** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4346when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4347it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4348history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4349
4350The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4351return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4352empty input.
4353
4354** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4355for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4356`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4357Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4358`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4359
4360** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4361echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4362a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4363default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4364
4365** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4366specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4367function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4368place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4369non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4370
4371** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4372If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4373up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4374end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4375
4376** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4377which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4378If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4379
4380** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4381holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4382was directed to display this buffer.
4383
4384** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4385with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4386describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4387other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4388set-window-configuration.
4389
4390** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4391window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4392positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4393windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4394
4395** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
4396override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
4397look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
4398
4399If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
4400non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
4401map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
4402
4403minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
4404and it is meant to be set by major modes.
4405
4406** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
4407except that it discards all text properties from the result.
4408
4409** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
4410USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
4411floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
4412
4413** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
4414to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
4415in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
4416it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
4417
4418** Menu changes
4419
4420*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
4421keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
4422better supported.
4423
4424The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
4425a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
4426you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
4427can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
4428then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
4429
4430*** A new format for menu items is supported.
4431
4432In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
4433 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
4434defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
4435starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
4436
4437The format is:
4438 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
4439 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
4440where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
4441string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
4442The supported properties include
4443
4444:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4445 item is enabled.
4446:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
4447 item should appear in the menu.
79214ddf 4448:filter FILTER-FN
a933dad1
DL
4449 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
4450 which will be REAL-BINDING.
4451 It should return a binding to use instead.
4452:keys DESCRIPTION
4453 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
4454 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
4455 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
4456:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
4457 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
4458 keyboard binding.
4459:key-sequence nil
4460 This means that the command normally has no
4461 keyboard equivalent.
4462:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
4463:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
4464 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
4465 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
4466 value says whether this button is currently selected.
4467
4468Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
4469Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
4470
4471(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
4472
4473** New event types
4474
4475*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
4476mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
4477corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
4478which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
4479
4480 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
4481
4482where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4483same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
4484indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
4485negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
4486the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
4487forward, away from the user.
4488
4489As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4490
4491*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
4492files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
4493and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
4494filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
4495loaded into Emacs. The format is:
4496
4497 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
4498
4499where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
4500same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
4501that were dragged and dropped.
4502
4503As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
4504
4505** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
4506
4507*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
4508any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
4509to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
4510
4511*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
4512can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
4513that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
4514
4515*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
4516in Emacs 19 and before.
4517
4518The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
4519The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
4520
4521*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
4522buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
4523unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
4524representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
4525
4526This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
4527as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
4528viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
4529one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
4530will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
4531
4532This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
4533representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
4534(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
4535consistent with the new representation.
4536
4537*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
4538representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
4539about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
4540however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4541
4542The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
4543nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
4544using the table nonascii-translation-table.
4545
4546*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
4547representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
4548representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
4549
4550The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
4551loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
4552is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
4553
4554*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4555which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
4556
4557*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
4558which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
4559
4560*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
4561portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
4562so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
4563You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
4564
4565*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
4566it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
4567
4568*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
4569convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
4570buffer or string being searched.
4571
4572One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
4573[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
4574searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
4575searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
4576obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
4577you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
4578expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
4579
4580*** Structure of coding system changed.
4581
4582All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
4583by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
4584which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
4585as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
4586vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
4587your own alias name of a coding system by the function
4588define-coding-system-alias.
4589
4590The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
4591the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
4592access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
4593pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
4594character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
4595safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
4596'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
4597`iso-8859-1'.
4598
4599Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
4600The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
4601coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
4602(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
4603
4604Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
4605also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
4606are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
4607the other character sets and read it back correctly.
4608
4609*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
4610proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
4611This function requires a user interaction.
4612
4613*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
4614find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
4615select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
4616systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
4617a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
4618select-safe-coding-system.
4619
4620*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
4621decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
4622last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
4623was done.
4624
4625*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
4626used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
4627coding systems used by some specific language environment.
4628
4629*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
4630return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
4631characters are found, they now return a list of single element
4632`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
4633
4634*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
4635coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
4636coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
4637converted.
4638
4639*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
4640coding system for communicating with other X clients.
4641
4642*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
4643character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
4644character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
4645each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
4646either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
4647range of characters.
4648
4649*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
4650Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
4651
4652*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
4653in the current buffer at position POS.
4654
4655*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
4656input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
4657function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
4658character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
4659event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
4660binding input-method-function to nil.
4661
4662The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
4663method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
4664input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
4665the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
4666not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
4667
4668The input method function is not called when reading the second and
4669subsequent events of a key sequence.
4670
4671*** You can customize any language environment by using
4672set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
4673
4674The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
4675customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
4676instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
4677environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
4678exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
4679\f
4680* Changes in Emacs 20.1
4681
4682** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
4683options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
4684at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
4685tree structure.
4686
4687M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
4688user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
4689
4690With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
4691session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
4692in your .emacs file.)
4693
4694** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
4695You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
4696
4697** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
4698This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
4699
4700** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
4701immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
4702kills the region.
4703
4704The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
4705delete the character before point, as usual.
4706
4707** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
4708on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
4709by setting search-highlight to nil.)
4710
4711** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
4712insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
4713the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
4714onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
4715history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
4716past.)
4717
4718** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
4719This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
4720in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
4721TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
4722makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
4723
4724As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
4725and is an alias for it.
4726
4727If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
4728use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
4729
4730** Scrolling changes
4731
4732*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
4733position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
4734
4735In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
4736on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
4737where it started.
4738
4739*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
4740move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
4741screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
4742does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
4743
4744*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
4745top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
4746comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
4747recenters the window.
4748
4749** International character set support (MULE)
4750
4751Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
4752including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
4753Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
4754Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
4755features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
4756MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
4757
4758Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
4759coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
4760character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
4761variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
4762into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
4763
4764Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
4765generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
4766supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
4767language, to make it possible to type them.
4768
4769The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
4770character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
4771
4772The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
4773to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
4774
4775You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
4776
4777 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
4778
4779Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
4780characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
4781argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
4782already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
4783characters for their work until they want to change.
4784
4785*** Input methods
4786
4787An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
4788specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
4789has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
4790the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
4791support several input methods.
4792
4793The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
4794another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
4795work.
4796
4797A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
4798characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
4799composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
4800consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
4801sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
4802letter.
4803
4804The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
4805by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
4806First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
4807marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
4808mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
4809
4810None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
4811they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
4812phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
4813converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
4814
4815Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
4816word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
4817typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
4818the first guess is wrong.
4819
4820*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
4821turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
4822
4823If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
4824byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
4825they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
4826the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
4827
4828However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
4829use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
4830includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
4831translate automatically to and from either one.
4832
4833*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
4834
4835Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
4836file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
4837sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
4838what you want.
4839
4840If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
4841example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
4842system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
4843multibyte characters in that buffer.
4844
4845If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
4846character conversion as well.
4847
4848*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
4849
4850A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
4851Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
4852requires using many fonts.
4853
4854Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
4855collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
4856
4857A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
4858the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
4859have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
4860you would use a font.
4861
4862If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
4863specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
4864display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
4865
4866The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
4867(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
4868characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
4869or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
4870and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
4871
4872*** Defining fontsets.
4873
4874Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
4875chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
4876with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
4877
4878Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
4879of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
4880`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
4881standard fontset are created automatically.
4882
4883If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
4884argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
4885FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
4886with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
4887name is `fontset-startup'.
4888
4889Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
4890The resource value should have this form:
4891 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
4892FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
4893 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
4894 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
4895 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
4896The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
4897of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
4898CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
4899FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
4900
4901Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
4902last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
4903You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
4904
4905For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
4906font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
4907following resource,
4908 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
4909the font for ASCII is generated as below:
4910 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
4911Here is the substitution rule:
4912 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
4913 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
4914 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
4915 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
4916 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
4917
4918The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
4919fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
4920that function explicitly to create a fontset.
4921
4922With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
4923like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
4924name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
4925fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
4926fontsets.
4927
4928*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
4929defaults for a particular choice of language.
4930
4931Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
4932method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
4933visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
4934already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
4935language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
4936system for new files that you create.
4937
4938It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
4939set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
4940whole Emacs session.
4941
4942For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
4943chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
4944with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
4945
4946*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
4947specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
4948specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
4949the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
4950coding systems that Emacs supports.
4951
4952*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
4953lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
4954This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
4955After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
4956is used for *the immediately following command*.
4957
4958So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
4959write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
4960
4961If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
4962then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
4963
4964For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
4965visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
4966
4967*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
4968construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
4969to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
4970specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
4971of the file.
4972
4973*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
4974the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
4975code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
4976translated into that character code.
4977
4978This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
4979various countries to support the languages of those countries.
4980
4981By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
4982
4983*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
4984the coding system for keyboard input.
4985
4986Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
4987with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
4988some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
4989
4990By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
4991
4992Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
4993input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
4994translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
4995to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
4996designed to work with terminals.
4997
4998*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
4999specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5000This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5001has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5002translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5003in the corresponding buffer.
5004
5005By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5006
5007*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5008to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5009It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5010
5011*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5012an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5013command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5014want to use.
5015
5016C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5017method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5018
5019*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5020layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5021remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5022which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5023
5024*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5025the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5026related information.
5027
5028*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5029HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5030scripts.
5031
5032*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5033information about the support for a particular language.
5034You specify the language as an argument.
5035
5036*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5037the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5038first dash.
5039
5040A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5041(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5042whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
50431 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5044
5045 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5046 B big5 (Chinese)
5047 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5048 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5049 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5050 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5051 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5052 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5053 K euc-korea (Korean)
5054 R koi8 (Russian)
5055 Q tibetan
5056 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5057 T lao
5058 T tis620 (Thai)
5059 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5060 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5061 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5062 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5063 z hz (Chinese)
5064
5065When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5066two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5067coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5068keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5069
5070*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5071conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5072
5073When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5074into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5075rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5076Rmail files themselves.
5077
5078*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5079conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5080
5081Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5082for sending mail:
5083
5084- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5085- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5086- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5087 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5088- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5089
5090*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5091to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5092Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5093translations.
5094
5095** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5096of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5097insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5098without any conversion.
5099
5100** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5101You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5102RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5103any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5104
5105** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5106functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5107
5108Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5109Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5110
5111Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5112mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5113
5114** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5115complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5116in the buffer before point.
5117
5118With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5119symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5120you are using.
5121
5122With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5123just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5124
5125** File locking works with NFS now.
5126
5127The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5128in the same directory as FILENAME.
5129
5130This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5131works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5132can become a bottleneck.
5133
5134The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5135does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5136create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5137file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5138rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5139so useful that the change is worth while.
5140
5141When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5142are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5143collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5144tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5145
5146** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5147it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5148show-paren-mode.
5149
5150** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5151selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5152delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5153
5154** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5155within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5156complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5157
5158** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5159it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5160set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5161
5162** Changes in View mode.
5163
5164*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5165Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5166
5167*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5168view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5169
5170*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5171previous state.
5172
5173*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5174scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5175
5176*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5177non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5178not just the selected window.
5179
5180*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5181read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5182turns View mode on or off.
5183
5184*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5185how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5186delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5187
5188** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5189now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5190
5191** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5192has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5193presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5194which version to compare with.
5195
5196** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
79214ddf 5197blocks if a match is inside the block.
a933dad1
DL
5198
5199The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5200is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5201isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5202shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5203
5204By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5205of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5206blocks, all of them or none.
5207
5208** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5209current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5210confirmation first.
5211
5212** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5213now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5214However, the mode will not be changed if
5215(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5216(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5217 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5218(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5219
5220This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5221
5222However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5223these commands do not change the major mode.
5224
5225** M-x occur changes.
5226
5227*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5228it performs a case-sensitive search.
5229
5230*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5231if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5232using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5233
5234** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5235in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5236window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5237that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5238buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5239
5240** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5241after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5242appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5243come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5244
5245** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5246selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5247buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5248
5249** Outline mode changes.
5250
5251*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5252
5253*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5254
5255** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5256you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5257Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5258was already active.
5259
5260The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5261unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5262get confused by it.
5263
5264If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5265set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5266
5267** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5268
5269*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5270conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5271character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5272including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5273
5274The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5275mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5276copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5277
5278*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5279are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5280values.
5281
5282`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5283case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5284`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5285case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5286
5287** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5288certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5289can be. The default value is 30.
5290
5291** Changes in Mail mode.
5292
5293*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5294Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5295composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5296`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5297`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5298behavior.
5299
5300C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5301compose-mail-other-frame.
5302
5303*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5304the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5305replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5306buffer that shows the original message.
5307
5308*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5309with separator lines around the contents.
5310
5311*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5312in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5313definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5314need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5315
5316*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5317
5318**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5319for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5320controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5321Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5322
5323**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5324to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5325/etc/passwd.
5326
5327**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5328to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5329/etc/passwd.
5330
5331** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5332special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5333directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5334reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5335
5336Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5337when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5338be taken to be magic.
5339
5340** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5341files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5342available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5343
5344M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5345(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5346
5347** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5348suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5349
5350In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5351
5352new key dired.el binding old key
5353------- ---------------- -------
5354 * c dired-change-marks c
5355 * m dired-mark m
5356 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5357 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5358 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5359 * u dired-unmark u
5360 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5361 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5362 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5363 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5364 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5365 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5366
5367** Rmail changes.
5368
5369*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5370saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5371chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5372each time you run it.
5373
5374*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5375whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5376
5377*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5378messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5379means to move in the opposite direction.
5380
5381*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5382you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5383
5384*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5385just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5386It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5387can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5388for output.
5389
5390** Gnus changes.
5391
5392*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5393
79214ddf
FP
5394*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5395Gnus.
a933dad1 5396
79214ddf 5397*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
a933dad1
DL
5398`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
5399
5400*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
5401article mode line.
5402
5403*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
5404
5405*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
5406
5407(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
5408
5409*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
5410are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
5411`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
5412
5413*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
5414
5415*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
5416
5417*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
5418See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
5419
5420*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
5421Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
5422used to pick articles.
5423
5424*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
5425another have been added.
5426
5427 `M-x gnus-change-server'
5428
5429*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
5430generating lines in buffers.
5431
5432*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
5433`M-C-_'.
5434
5435*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
5436
5437*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
5438
5439 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
5440
5441*** Scores can be decayed.
79214ddf 5442
a933dad1
DL
5443 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
5444
5445*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
5446Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
5447
5448*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
5449the native server.
5450
5451 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
5452
5453*** A new command for reading collections of documents
5454(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
5455
5456*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
5457
5458*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
5459even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
5460
5461*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
5462(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
5463
5464 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
5465 a group.
5466
5467*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
5468sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
5469
5470 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
5471
5472*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
5473
5474 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
5475
5476*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
79214ddf 5477
a933dad1
DL
5478 Use the `Y c' command.
5479
5480*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
5481
5482*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
5483
5484 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
5485
5486*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
5487from incoming mail before saving the mail.
79214ddf 5488
a933dad1
DL
5489 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
5490
5491*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
5492
5493*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
5494the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
5495
5496 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
5497
5498Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
5499and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
5500from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
5501hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
5502this issue.)
5503
5504Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
5505automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
5506particular news group. This can be done by:
5507
5508 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
5509
5510Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
5511of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
5512"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
5513system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
5514for reading and posting).
5515
5516CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
5517 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
5518Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
5519newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
5520there.
5521
5522Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
5523default. Here are some of these default settings:
5524
5525 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
5526 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
5527 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
5528 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
5529 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
5530
5531When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
5532the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
5533
5534** CC mode changes.
5535
5536*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
5537code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
5538values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
5539this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
5540Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
5541loaded.
5542
5543If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
79214ddf 5544Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
a933dad1 5545style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
79214ddf
FP
5546share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
5547c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
a933dad1
DL
5548must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
5549
5550*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
5551of the current buffer.
5552
5553*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
5554it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
5555of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
5556
5557*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
5558style that the Python developers like.
5559
5560*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
5561This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
5562just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
5563
5564** VC Changes [new]
5565
5566** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
5567name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
5568directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
5569
5570This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
5571master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
5572developers.
5573
5574You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
5575RET in a buffer visiting that file.
5576
5577*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
5578other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
5579writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
5580calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
5581
5582*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
5583version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
5584
5585** Calendar changes.
5586
5587A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
5588of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
5589for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
5590
5591** ps-print changes
5592
79214ddf 5593There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
a933dad1
DL
5594
5595*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
5596
5597The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
5598formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
5599`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
5600`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
5601It defaults to `letter'.
5602If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
5603
5604The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
79214ddf 5605of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
a933dad1
DL
5606non-nil means "landscape" mode.
5607
5608The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
5609It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
79214ddf 5610It defaults to 1.
a933dad1
DL
5611
5612*** Horizontal layout
5613
5614The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
5615`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
5616All are measured in points.
5617
5618*** Vertical layout
5619
5620The vertical layout is determined by the variables
5621`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
5622All are measured in points.
5623
5624*** Headers
5625
5626If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
5627`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
5628margin above the text.
5629
79214ddf 5630If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
a933dad1
DL
5631framing box is printed around the header.
5632
5633The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
5634`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
5635
79214ddf
FP
5636The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
5637`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
a933dad1
DL
5638`ps-header-font-size'.
5639
5640*** Font managing
5641
5642The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
5643used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
5644`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
5645elements to this alist.
5646
79214ddf 5647The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
a933dad1
DL
5648for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
5649
5650** hideshow changes.
5651
5652*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
79214ddf 5653C++, ; for lisp).
a933dad1
DL
5654
5655*** Support for java-mode added.
5656
5657*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
5658in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
5659
5660*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
5661the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
5662way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
5663
5664*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
5665robust and a lot faster.
5666
79214ddf 5667*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
a933dad1
DL
5668
5669*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
5670to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
5671documentation for more details.
5672
5673** Changes in Enriched mode.
5674
5675*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
5676filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
5677of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
5678use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
5679the next time unless the fill-column is different.
5680
5681*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
5682distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
5683as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
5684as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
5685
5686** Font Lock mode
5687
5688*** Custom support
5689
5690The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
5691font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
5692faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
5693group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
5694your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
5695consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
5696
5697You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
5698
5699*** Maximum decoration
5700
5701Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
5702default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
5703of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
5704supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
5705to get the old behavior.
5706
5707*** New support
5708
5709Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
5710
5711Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
5712support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
5713
5714*** Configurable support
5715
5716Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
5717additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
5718c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
5719java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
5720list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
5721of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
5722convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
5723
5724Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
5725way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
5726it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
5727
5728*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
5729
5730You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
5731highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
5732for any mode.
5733
5734For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
5735
5736 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
5737
5738in your ~/.emacs.
5739
5740*** New faces
5741
5742Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
5743font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
5744distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
5745to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
5746
5747*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
5748
5749The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
5750cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
5751same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
5752
5753*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
5754
5755The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
5756according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
5757the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
5758non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
5759refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
5760the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
5761Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
5762
5763This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
5764For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
5765this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
5766refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
5767containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
5768the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
5769
5770As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
5771
5772Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
5773Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
5774Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
5775new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
5776
5777If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
5778settings.
5779
5780** Ada mode changes.
5781
5782*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
5783If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
5784procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
5785you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
5786stubs.
5787
5788*** There are two new commands:
5789 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
5790 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
5791
5792The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
5793`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
79214ddf 5794`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
a933dad1
DL
5795
5796*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
5797is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
5798Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
5799
5800*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
5801formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
5802places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
5803space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
5804
5805** Scheme mode changes.
5806
5807*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
5808mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
5809for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
5810with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
5811have any effect.
5812
5813If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
5814still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
5815scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
5816variables as buffer-local variables.
5817
5818*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
5819Use M-x dsssl-mode.
5820
133c9e59
GM
5821** Changes to the emacsclient program
5822
875c1439
GM
5823*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
5824USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
5825associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
5826can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
5827
133c9e59 5828*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
a933dad1
DL
5829it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
5830buffer in Emacs.
5831
133c9e59
GM
5832*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
5833use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
5834ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
5835option takes precedence.
5836
a933dad1
DL
5837** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
5838constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
5839(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
5840
5841** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
5842which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
5843the current defun.
5844
5845** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
5846following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
5847
5848** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
5849and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
5850necessary).
5851
5852** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
5853if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
5854these register values no longer become completely useless.
5855If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
5856asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
5857it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
5858
5859** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
5860example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
5861be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
5862you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
5863
5864You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
5865variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
5866file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
5867revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
5868only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
5869
5870** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
5871since it applies only to the current frame.
5872
5873** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
5874file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
5875and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
5876
5877This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
5878multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
5879variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
5880tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
5881instead of just the file you are editing.
5882
5883** RefTeX mode
5884
5885RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
5886and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
5887different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
5888multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
5889turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
5890
79214ddf 5891C-c ( reftex-label
a933dad1
DL
5892 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
5893 knows which kind of label is needed.
5894
5895C-c ) reftex-reference
5896 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
5897 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
5898
5899C-c [ reftex-citation
5900 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
5901 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
5902
5903C-c & reftex-view-crossref
5904 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
5905
5906C-c = reftex-toc
5907 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
5908 can quickly jump to every section.
79214ddf 5909
a933dad1
DL
5910Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
5911commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
5912Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
5913reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
5914C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
5915
5916** Changes in BibTeX mode.
5917
5918*** Info documentation is now available.
5919
5920*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
5921both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
5922
5923*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
5924bibtex-user-optional-fields.
5925
5926*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
5927(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
5928
5929*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
5930entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
5931appropriate functions.
5932
5933*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
5934entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
5935
5936*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
5937been cleaned.
5938
5939*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
5940bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
5941
5942*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
5943shall be delimited.
5944
5945*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
5946bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
5947bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
5948
5949*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
5950field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
5951prefixed with `ALT'.
5952
5953*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
5954bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
5955formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
5956documentation).
5957
5958*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
5959documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
5960for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
5961
5962*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
5963comma should be inserted at end of last field.
5964
5965*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
5966alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
5967signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
5968
5969*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
5970
5971*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
5972
5973*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
5974from alien sources.
5975
5976*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
5977to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
5978crossref entries.
5979
5980*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
5981region.
5982
5983*** Added support for imenu.
5984
5985*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
5986of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
5987`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
5988`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
5989
5990*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
5991from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
5992
5993** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
5994
30a009a5 5995** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
047f434a 5996
a933dad1
DL
5997** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
5998functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
5999Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6000as an argument.
6001
6002When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6003and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6004
6005** browse-url changes
6006
6007*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6008Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6009(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6010non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6011customization variables.
6012
6013*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6014
6015*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6016lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6017(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6018
6019** Changes in Ediff
6020
6021*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6022pops up the Info file for this command.
6023
6024*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6025the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6026merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6027directories).
6028
6029*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6030and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6031files in the same directory.
6032
6033*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6034The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6035related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6036
6037** Changes in Viper
6038
6039*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
79214ddf 6040*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
a933dad1
DL
6041 instead of vip-.
6042*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
79214ddf 6043*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
a933dad1
DL
6044Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6045*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6046*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6047*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6048color when Viper is in insert state.
6049*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6050Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6051viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6052
6053** Etags changes.
6054
6055*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6056default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6057Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6058variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6059not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6060
6061*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6062
6063*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6064constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6065
6066*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6067recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6068In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6069
6070*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6071C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6072recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6073methods and protocols.
6074
6075*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6076.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6077column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6078paragraph name.
6079
6080*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6081an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6082at least M times and as many as N times.
6083
6084** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6085in files has changed slightly.
6086
6087With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6088time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6089This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6090with old time-stamp-format values.
6091
6092In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6093(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6094This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6095reasons.
6096
6097In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6098natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6099fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6100(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6101time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6102specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6103
6104Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6105case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6106truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6107
6108The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6109being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6110future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6111recommended now will continue to work then.
6112
6113See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6114details.
6115
6116** There are some additional major modes:
6117
6118dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6119m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6120meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6121
6122** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6123copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6124into Emacs.
6125
6126** New Lisp packages include:
6127
6128*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6129
6130*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6131be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6132
6133*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6134
6135*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6136in shell buffers.
6137
6138*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6139See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6140and `elint-defun'.
6141
6142*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6143meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6144ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6145strings or comments.
6146
6147These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6148abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6149you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6150insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6151at these points.
6152
6153*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6154can visit them by short forms of their names.
6155
6156*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6157Emacs Lisp function at point.
6158
6159*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6160
6161*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6162switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6163
6164*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6165
6166*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6167
6168*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6169
6170*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6171from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6172
6173*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6174You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6175inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6176original place after inserting the copy.
6177
6178*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6179on the buffer.
6180
6181You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6182velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6183(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6184
6185Enable mouse-drag with:
6186 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6187-or-
6188 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6189
6190*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6191mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6192
6193*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6194It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6195
6196*** ogonek
6197
6198The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6199Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6200platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6201TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6202ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6203prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6204instance) and vice versa.
6205
6206To use this package load it using
6207 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6208Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
79214ddf 6209 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
a933dad1
DL
6210 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6211The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6212ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6213
6214*** Interface to ph.
6215
6216Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6217
6218The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6219services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6220these servers.
6221
6222*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6223
6224*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6225You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6226while the real cursor does not move.
6227
6228*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6229for visiting your favorite web sites.
6230
6231*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6232so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6233
6234** movemail change
6235
6236Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6237mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6238supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6239user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6240
6241This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6242\f
6243* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6244
6245** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6246
6247Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6248end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6249Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6250file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6251file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6252
6253To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6254C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6255coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6256specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6257LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6258save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6259\f
6260* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6261
6262** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6263Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6264vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6265Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6266
6267** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6268to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6269
6270In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6271don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6272"win".
6273
6274** Basic Lisp changes
6275
6276*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6277evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6278
6279*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6280be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6281or by the user.
6282
6283The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6284
6285*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6286
6287(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6288(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6289
6290*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6291usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6292its argument.
6293
6294*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6295
6296*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6297
6298*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6299
6300*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6301error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6302include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6303`format' function.
6304
6305*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6306or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6307whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6308
6309*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6310either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6311adding one of these suffixes.
6312
6313*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6314which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
79214ddf 6315If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
a933dad1
DL
6316
6317We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6318because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6319
6320*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6321
6322*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6323You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6324
6325*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6326conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6327
6328 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6329
6330BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6331BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6332
6333*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6334choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6335restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6336works using `save-current-buffer'.
6337
6338*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6339write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6340of the last form.
6341
6342*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6343which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6344last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6345as the last form.
6346
6347*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6348characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6349matches.
6350
6351For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6352
6353*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6354with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6355Then it returns that string.
6356
6357For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6358
6359(with-output-to-string
6360 (princ "The buffer is ")
6361 (princ (buffer-name)))
6362
6363returns "The buffer is foo".
6364
6365** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6366is non-nil.
6367
6368These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6369buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6370characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6371
6372*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6373a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6374
6375Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6376character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6377Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6378position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6379characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6380 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6381
6382ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6383Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6384non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6385characters".
6386
6387The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6388through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6389"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6390range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6391leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6392
6393*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6394(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6395multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
6396character, which may be more than one buffer position.
6397
6398This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
6399always one buffer position, need to be changed.
6400
6401However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
79214ddf 6402
a933dad1
DL
6403*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
6404because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
6405have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
6406the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
6407guaranteed.
6408
6409*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
6410between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
6411character).
6412
6413When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
6414
6415 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
6416 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
6417 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
6418 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
6419 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
6420
6421*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
6422
6423*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
6424`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
6425more than the number of characters.
6426
6427You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
6428it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
6429\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
6430is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
6431follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
6432newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
6433
6434*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
6435and returns a string containing those characters.
6436
6437*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
6438(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
6439counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
6440character, sref signals an error.
6441
6442*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
6443in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
6444string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6445
6446*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
6447in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
6448region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
6449
6450*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
6451the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
6452to a vector of the characters in it.
6453
6454*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
6455of a string. You call it as follows:
6456
6457 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
6458
6459This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
6460STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
6461This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
6462Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
6463it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
6464
6465*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
6466if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6467
6468*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
6469if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
6470
6471*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
6472to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
6473not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
6474which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
6475
6476(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
6477
6478This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
6479
6480The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
6481If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
6482are not included in the resulting value.
6483
6484The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
6485at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
6486WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
6487is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
6488
6489If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
6490place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
6491character extends across that column), then the padding character
6492PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
6493string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
6494column START-COLUMN.
6495
6496*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
6497the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
6498necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
6499difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
6500changed text, before the change.
6501
6502*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
6503sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
6504one character set for each script, not for each language.
6505
6506**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
6507
6508**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
6509
6510**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
6511set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
6512
6513**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
6514name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
6515which identify the character within that character set.
6516
6517**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
6518byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
6519opposite of split-char.
6520
6521**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
6522of all the characters between BEG and END.
6523
6524**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
6525of all the characters in a string.
6526
6527*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
6528and specifying coding systems.
6529
6530**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
6531system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
6532of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
6533(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
6534and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
6535as what to do about code conversion.)
6536
6537**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
6538name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
6539
6540**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6541for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6542except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
6543
6544Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6545which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
6546to match against a file name.
6547
6548VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6549a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6550decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6551to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6552systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6553specifies the coding system for encoding.
6554
6555If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6556or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6557
6558**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
6559the coding system to use for network sockets.
6560
6561Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
6562which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
6563either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
6564service names.
6565
6566VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
6567a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
6568decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
6569to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
6570systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
6571specifies the coding system for encoding.
6572
6573If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
6574or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
6575
6576**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
6577for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
6578except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
6579start the subprocess.
6580
6581**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
6582systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
6583when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
6584(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
6585to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
6586
6587**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
6588coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
6589subprocess.
6590
6591It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
6592but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
6593start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
6594connection permanently or until overridden.
6595
6596The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
6597file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
6598network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
6599coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
6600It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
6601system for one operation at a time.
6602
6603**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
6604files, subprocesses or network connections.
6605
6606**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
6607coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
6608The value is a cons cell,
6609 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
6610where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
6611the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
6612input to the subprocess.
6613
6614**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
6615change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
6616
6617** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
6618customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
6619you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
6620
6621You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
6622variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
6623information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
6624legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
6625customization.
6626
6627Thus, instead of writing
6628
6629 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
6630 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
6631
6632you would now write this:
6633
6634 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
6635 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
6636 :type 'boolean
6637 :group foo)
6638
6639The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
6640two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
6641describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
6642for a description of them.
6643
6644The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
6645should belong to. You define a new group like this:
6646
6647 (defgroup ispell nil
6648 "Spell checking using Ispell."
6649 :group 'processes)
6650
6651The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
6652group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
6653but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
6654to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
6655second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
6656
6657Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
6658package should have just one group; a more complex package should
6659have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
6660package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
6661first-level subgroups.
6662
6663** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
6664
6665This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
6666separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
6667
6668** easy-mmode
6669
6670The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
6671developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
6672only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
6673predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
6674`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
6675`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
6676
6677** Text property changes
6678
6679*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
6680text property.
6681
6682*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
6683previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
6684place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
6685functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
6686starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
6687
6688If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
6689LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
6690of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
6691position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
6692
6693*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
6694value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
6695is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
6696
6697** Changes in invisibility features
6698
6699*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
6700hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
6701is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
6702should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
6703would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
6704make the overlay visible.
6705
6706During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
6707invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
6708needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
6709which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
6710the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
6711t when it should hide it.
6712
6713*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
6714
6715Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
79214ddf
FP
6716invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
6717and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
a933dad1 6718Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
79214ddf 6719manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
a933dad1
DL
6720Here is an example of how to do this:
6721
6722 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
79214ddf 6723 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
a933dad1 6724 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
79214ddf 6725 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
a933dad1
DL
6726
6727 ...
6728 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
6729
6730 ...
6731 ;; When done with the overlays:
6732 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
6733 ;; Or respectively:
6734 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
6735
6736** Changes in syntax parsing.
6737
6738*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
6739`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
6740obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
6741`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
6742
6743If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
6744is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
6745used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
6746
6747When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
6748character in the buffer is calculated thus:
6749
6750 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
6751 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
6752
6753 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
6754 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
6755 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
6756
6757 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
6758 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
6759 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
6760 determine the syntax type of the character.
6761
6762 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
6763 of the current buffer.
6764
6765*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
6766value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
6767for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
6768
6769*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
6770and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
6771only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
6772character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
6773another character with the same code (unless quoted).
6774
6775These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
6776text property.
6777
6778*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
6779arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
6780of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
6781
6782*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
6783(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
6784element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
6785nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
6786string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
6787
6788*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
6789syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
6790`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
6791
6792** Changes in face features
6793
6794*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
6795if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
6796
6797*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
6798of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
6799
6800*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
6801set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
6802
6803*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
6804set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
6805
6806*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
6807by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
6808and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
6809the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
6810overlay property).
6811
6812This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
6813arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
6814
6815** Changes in file-handling functions
6816
6817*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
6818directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
6819they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
6820is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
6821
6822This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
6823begins with ~.
6824
6825*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
6826it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
6827
6828*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
6829the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
6830
6831*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
6832as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
6833
6834*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
6835character code conversion as well as other things.
6836
6837Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
6838(formerly it did not).
6839
6840*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
6841environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
6842
6843*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
6844instead of constant strings.
6845
6846*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
6847to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
6848any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
6849
6850substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
6851in the same way as before.
6852
6853*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
6854The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
6855which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
6856
6857*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
6858error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
6859else, and returns nil.
6860
6861*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
6862directory cannot be listed.
6863
6864** Changes in minibuffer input
6865
6866*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
6867read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
6868additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
6869argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
6870ways:
6871
6872 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
6873 It is available through the history command M-n.
6874
6875*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
6876read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
6877argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
6878minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
6879enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
6880
6881In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
6882argument in this way.
6883
6884*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
6885from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
6886minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
6887
6888** Echo area features
6889
6890*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
6891echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
6892minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
6893after the echo area is cleared.
6894
6895*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
6896in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
6897
6898** Keyboard input features
6899
6900*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
6901set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
6902
6903*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
6904received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
6905by keyboard macros.
6906
6907** Frame-related changes
6908
6909*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
6910creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
6911hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
6912
6913*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
6914the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
6915has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
6916
6917*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
6918selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
6919value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
6920in the selected frame.
6921
6922*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
6923is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
6924which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
6925
6926** X Windows features
6927
6928*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
6929x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
6930x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
6931
6932*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
6933The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
6934
6935*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
6936MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
6937A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
6938
6939If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
6940it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
6941
6942** Subprocess features
6943
6944*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
6945functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
6946automatically.
6947
6948*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
6949and returns the output from the command as a string.
6950
6951*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
6952and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
6953
6954** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
6955does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
6956
6957** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
6958at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
6959goes after the other menu items.
6960
6961** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
79214ddf 6962of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
a933dad1
DL
6963around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
6964are in use.
6965
6966The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
6967series of several changes--if that seems safe.
6968
6969Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
6970after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
6971form.
6972
6973** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
6974is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
6975but its hook is still run.
6976
6977** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
6978for errors that are handled by condition-case.
6979
6980If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
6981regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
6982useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
6983
6984This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
6985are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
6986filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
6987warned.
6988
6989** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
6990way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
6991
6992** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
6993integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
6994functions like display-time.
6995
6996** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
6997name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
6998
6999** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7000can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7001is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7002
7003** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7004if there is an error in compilation.
7005
7006** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7007switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7008argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7009they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7010
7011** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7012Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7013the *scratch* buffer.
7014
7015** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7016The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7017where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7018e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7019
7020** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7021and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7022It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7023
7024** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7025using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7026variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7027and compose-mail-other-frame.
7028
7029** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7030can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7031full name of the specified user will be returned.
7032
7033** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7034of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7035where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7036in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7037option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7038files at all.
7039
7040** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7041and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7042width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7043the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7044
7045For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7046minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7047with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7048is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7049
7050** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7051
7052** imenu.el changes.
7053
7054You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
79214ddf 7055item from menu created by imenu.
a933dad1
DL
7056
7057An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7058#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7059select one of those items.
7060\f
7061* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7062\f
7063* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7064
7065** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7066mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7067
7068** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7069use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7070Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7071\f
7072* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7073
7074** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7075To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7076
7077** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7078conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7079matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7080expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7081word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7082all caps.
7083
7084** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7085at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7086
7087When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7088does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7089as in previous Emacs versions.
7090
7091** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7092non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7093time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7094frames.
7095
7096** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7097if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7098This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7099Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7100accident.
7101
7102** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7103keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7104It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7105line and then executing the macro.
7106
7107This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7108
7109** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7110(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7111characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7112characters.
7113
7114** Font Lock mode
7115
7116*** Font Lock support modes
7117
7118Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7119below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7120hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7121to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7122Font Lock mode is enabled.
7123
7124For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7125
7126 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7127
7128in your ~/.emacs.
7129
7130*** lazy-lock
7131
7132The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7133only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7134becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7135Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7136occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7137buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7138Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7139
7140To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7141
7142 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7143
7144To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7145
7146** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7147
7148*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7149paren and key.
7150
7151*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7152supported.
7153
7154** Gnus changes.
7155
7156Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7157commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7158significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7159previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7160
7161Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7162between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7163
79214ddf 7164*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
a933dad1
DL
7165variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7166obsolete.
7167
7168*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7169missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7170
7171 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7172
7173*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7174
7175 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7176
7177*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
79214ddf 7178referred.
a933dad1
DL
7179
7180*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7181
7182 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7183
7184*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7185
7186 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7187
7188*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
79214ddf 7189buffers.
a933dad1
DL
7190
7191 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7192
7193*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7194
7195 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7196
7197*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7198
7199 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7200
7201*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7202
7203 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7204
7205*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7206is possible.
7207
7208 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7209
7210*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7211groups of groups.
7212
7213*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7214
7215*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
79214ddf 7216batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
a933dad1
DL
7217
7218*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7219
7220*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7221
7222*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7223
7224 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7225
7226*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7227expiration times.
7228
7229*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7230
7231*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7232process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7233
7234*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7235articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7236bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7237
7238*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7239articles with the `*' command.
7240
7241*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7242
7243*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7244
7245 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7246
7247*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7248
79214ddf 7249*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
a933dad1
DL
7250`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7251
7252*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
79214ddf 7253buffer.
a933dad1
DL
7254
7255*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7256
7257*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7258
7259*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7260
7261 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7262
79214ddf 7263*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
a933dad1
DL
7264
7265 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7266
79214ddf 7267*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
a933dad1
DL
7268
7269*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7270
79214ddf 7271*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
a933dad1 7272
79214ddf 7273 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
a933dad1
DL
7274 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7275
7276*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
79214ddf 7277refetching.
a933dad1
DL
7278
7279 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7280
7281*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7282buffer to allow easier treatment.
7283
7284*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7285
7286*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7287
7288 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7289
7290*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
79214ddf 7291articles.
a933dad1
DL
7292
7293 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7294
79214ddf 7295*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
a933dad1
DL
7296
7297*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7298cited text to hide is now customizable.
7299
7300 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7301
7302*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7303
7304 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7305
7306*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7307
7308*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7309
7310The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7311in greater detail.
7312\f
7313* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7314
7315** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7316second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7317asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7318exists.
7319
7320** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7321as well as lists.
7322
7323** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7324of a given keymap.
7325
7326** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7327given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7328keymap or nil.
7329
7330** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7331an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7332name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7333menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7334equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7335alias.
7336\f
7337* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7338
7339** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7340
7341Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7342This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7343was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7344far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7345pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7346
7347For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7348you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7349`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7350
7351** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7352
7353The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7354do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7355It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7356much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7357chapter of the manual for details.
7358
7359However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7360customization variables take effect.
7361
7362** Marking with the mouse.
7363
7364When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7365highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7366using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7367
7368** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7369
7370*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7371
7372*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7373to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7374
7375*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7376in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7377you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7378application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7379applications, these problems are significant.
7380
7381If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7382likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7383However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7384will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7385other DOS application as a subprocess.
7386
7387Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7388You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7389
7390If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7391subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7392have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7393Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7394separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7395Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
7396
7397** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
7398
7399This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
7400which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
7401minibuffer contains.
7402
7403** `title' frame parameter and resource.
7404
7405The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
7406It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
7407It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
7408affects just the displayed title of the frame.
7409
7410The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
7411it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
7412and also serves as the default for the displayed title
7413when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
7414
7415** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
7416enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
7417
7418** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
7419F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
7420Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
7421
7422If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
7423menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
7424something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
7425the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
7426
7427 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
7428
7429** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
7430to replace the characters it "deletes".
7431
7432** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
7433
7434** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
7435a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
7436select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
7437It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
7438immediately after the selected one.
7439
7440This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
7441made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
7442
7443** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
7444
7445Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
7446directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
7447If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
7448Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
7449recover-session.
7450
7451You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
7452auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
7453will not work.
7454
7455Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
7456normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
7457this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
7458bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
7459now that the bug is fixed.
7460
7461** Changes to Version Control (VC)
7462
7463There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
7464when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
7465Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
7466which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
7467
7468If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
7469telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
7470VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
7471the link is visited and a warning displayed.
7472
7473** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
7474Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
7475is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
7476
7477There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
7478Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
7479enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
7480The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
7481remain normal.
7482
7483** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
7484header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
7485
7486Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
7487known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
7488offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
7489Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
7490
7491Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
7492of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
7493a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
7494name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
7495documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
7496`mail-directory-stream'.)
7497
7498** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
7499skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
7500characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
7501with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
7502
7503Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
7504- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
7505wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
7506
7507The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
7508less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
7509headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
7510Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
7511Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
7512fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
7513to a limitation in font-lock).
7514
7515External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
7516
7517** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
7518buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
7519buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
7520this example:
7521
7522 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
7523 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
7524
7525** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7526
7527*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
7528
7529*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
7530
7531*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
7532
7533*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
7534entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
7535will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
7536isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
7537(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
7538The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
7539
7540*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
7541does the same job.
7542
7543*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
7544"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
7545
7546*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
7547text.
7548
7549** Font Lock mode
7550
7551*** Global Font Lock mode
7552
7553Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
7554new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
7555font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
7556turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
7557on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
7558
7559For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
7560
7561 (global-font-lock-mode t)
7562
7563in your ~/.emacs.
7564
7565*** Local Refontification
7566
7567In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
7568However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
7569those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
7570command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
7571
7572In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
7573(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
7574current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
7575above and below point.
7576
7577With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
7578
7579** Follow mode
7580
7581Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
7582buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
7583side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
7584they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
7585split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
7586follow-mode.
7587
7588M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
7589
7590To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
7591command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
7592
7593** hide-show changes.
7594
7595The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
7596to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
7597normal hooks.
7598
7599** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
7600The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
7601
7602** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
7603recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
7604those that begin a function, record, or macro.
7605
7606** MSDOS Changes
7607
7608*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
7609Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
7610
7611*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
7612and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
7613
7614*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
7615
7616*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
7617pressing both mouse buttons.
7618
7619*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
7620restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
79214ddf 7621are:
a933dad1
DL
7622
7623**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
7624now works.
7625
7626**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
7627
7628**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
7629implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
7630
7631**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
7632
7633**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
7634
7635**** `M-x recover-session' works.
7636
7637**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
7638
7639**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
7640\f
7641* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
7642
7643** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
7644tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
7645remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
7646this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
7647behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
7648
7649** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
7650
7651The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
7652not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
7653need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
7654be different.
7655
7656It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
7657than `system-type'.
7658
7659See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
7660
7661** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
7662now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
7663
7664** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
7665that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
7666
7667** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
7668no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
7669reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
7670
7671The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
7672to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
7673like this:
7674
7675 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7676
7677SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
7678It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
7679becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
7680
7681REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
7682seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
7683means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
7684
7685*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
7686up if too much time passes.
7687
7688 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
7689
7690This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
7691If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
7692of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
7693form in BODY.
7694
7695*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
7696a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
7697call looks like this:
7698
7699 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
7700
7701SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
7702runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
7703timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
7704ARGS.
7705
7706Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
7707command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
7708command.
7709
7710REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
7711time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
7712does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
7713each time Emacs becomes idle.
7714
7715If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
7716idle for SECS seconds.
7717
7718*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
7719all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
7720programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
7721instead.
7722
7723*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
7724there is no answer within a certain time.
7725
7726 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
7727
7728asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
7729within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
7730Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
7731
7732** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
7733arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
7734meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
7735arguments in between are ignored.
7736
7737This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
7738the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
7739
7740** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
7741/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
7742/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
7743site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
7744version.
7745
7746It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
7747version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
7748for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
7749has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
7750and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
7751problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
7752
7753** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
7754.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
7755systems with limited file name syntax.
7756
7757Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
7758convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
7759for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
7760completions.el:
7761
7762(defvar save-completions-file-name
7763 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
7764 "*The filename to save completions to.")
7765
7766This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
7767depends on the operating system, because the definition of
7768convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
7769Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
7770MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
7771
7772** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
7773rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
7774minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
7775
7776** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
7777marker from its buffer position.
7778
7779** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
7780Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
7781The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
7782
7783** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
7784that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
7785condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
7786of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
7787matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
7788regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
7789
7790This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
7791errors that happen often during editing.
7792
7793** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
7794into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
7795puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
7796
7797** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
7798now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
7799
7800** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
7801a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
7802name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
7803to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
7804and not get-buffer-window.
7805
7806** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
7807calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
7808being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
7809
7810If you use this feature, you should set the variable
7811buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
7812property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
7813non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
7814are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
7815property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
7816over and over for the same text.
7817
7818** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
7819
7820*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
7821in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
7822
7823;; @(#) HEADER: text
7824;; $HEADER: text $
7825
7826in addition to the normal
7827
7828;; HEADER: text
7829
7830*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
7831checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
7832lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
7833\f
7834* For older news, see the file ONEWS.
7835
7836----------------------------------------------------------------------
7837Copyright information:
7838
404fa7d6 7839Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
7840
7841 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
7842 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
7843 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
7844 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
7845
7846 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
7847 of this document, or of portions of it,
7848 under the above conditions, provided also that they
7849 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
7850\f
7851Local variables:
7852mode: outline
7853paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
7854end: